WO2005114046A1 - Optical waveguide, planar illuminating device using the same and liquid crystal display device - Google Patents

Optical waveguide, planar illuminating device using the same and liquid crystal display device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2005114046A1
WO2005114046A1 PCT/JP2005/009245 JP2005009245W WO2005114046A1 WO 2005114046 A1 WO2005114046 A1 WO 2005114046A1 JP 2005009245 W JP2005009245 W JP 2005009245W WO 2005114046 A1 WO2005114046 A1 WO 2005114046A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
light
light guide
guide plate
parallel groove
exit surface
Prior art date
Application number
PCT/JP2005/009245
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
Osamu Iwasaki
Original Assignee
Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. filed Critical Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.
Publication of WO2005114046A1 publication Critical patent/WO2005114046A1/en

Links

Classifications

    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/0001Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
    • G02B6/0011Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form
    • G02B6/0013Means for improving the coupling-in of light from the light source into the light guide
    • G02B6/0015Means for improving the coupling-in of light from the light source into the light guide provided on the surface of the light guide or in the bulk of it
    • G02B6/002Means for improving the coupling-in of light from the light source into the light guide provided on the surface of the light guide or in the bulk of it by shaping at least a portion of the light guide, e.g. with collimating, focussing or diverging surfaces
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/0001Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
    • G02B6/0011Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form
    • G02B6/0033Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide
    • G02B6/005Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide provided by one optical element, or plurality thereof, placed on the light output side of the light guide
    • G02B6/0053Prismatic sheet or layer; Brightness enhancement element, sheet or layer
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/0001Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
    • G02B6/0011Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form
    • G02B6/0033Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide
    • G02B6/005Means for improving the coupling-out of light from the light guide provided by one optical element, or plurality thereof, placed on the light output side of the light guide
    • G02B6/0055Reflecting element, sheet or layer
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B6/00Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings
    • G02B6/0001Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems
    • G02B6/0011Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form
    • G02B6/0066Light guides; Structural details of arrangements comprising light guides and other optical elements, e.g. couplings specially adapted for lighting devices or systems the light guides being planar or of plate-like form characterised by the light source being coupled to the light guide
    • G02B6/007Incandescent lamp or gas discharge lamp
    • G02B6/0071Incandescent lamp or gas discharge lamp with elongated shape, e.g. tube

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a transparent light guide plate that diffuses light incident from a rod-shaped light source in a plane direction and emits more uniform illumination light from a light exit surface, a planar lighting device using the same, and a liquid crystal display device.
  • a backlight unit that illuminates a liquid crystal panel (LCD) with light from the rear side thereof to illuminate the liquid crystal panel is used in the liquid crystal display device.
  • the backlight unit uses a light source for illumination, a light guide plate for diffusing the emitted light and illuminating the liquid crystal panel, and a prism sheet and a diffusion sheet for uniformizing the light emitted from the light guide plate.
  • a backlight unit of a large liquid crystal television is a so-called direct type in which a light guide plate is disposed immediately above a light source for illumination, as disclosed in Japanese Utility Model Laid-Open No. 5-4133.
  • a plurality of cold-cathode tubes, which are light sources, are arranged on the back of a liquid crystal panel, and the inside is used as a white reflective surface to ensure a uniform light amount distribution and required luminance.
  • this method requires a thickness of about 30 mm in the vertical direction of the liquid crystal panel in order to make the light quantity distribution uniform in principle.
  • FIG. 43 is a schematic sectional view of a surface light source device having a light guide plate 100 disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-304623.
  • the surface light source device shown in FIG. After embedding, it is formed by arranging a reflection sheet 104 on the back surface of the light guide plate 100 and stacking a transmission light amount correction sheet 106, a light diffusion plate 108, and a prism sheet 110 on the emission surface of the light guide plate 100.
  • the light guide plate 100 has a substantially rectangular shape, and is formed using a resin into which fine particles that diffuse illumination light are dispersed and mixed.
  • the upper surface of the light guide plate 100 is flat, and is allocated to the emission surface.
  • a U-shaped cross section groove 100a for embedding the fluorescent lamp 102 is formed on the back surface (the surface opposite to the emission surface) of the light guide plate 100, and the emission surface of the light guide plate 100 is formed just above the fluorescent lamp 102. By avoiding this, a light quantity correction surface 100b that promotes emission of illumination light is formed.
  • Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-304623 discloses that a light guide plate 100 is formed by mixing fine particles, and a light amount correction surface formed on a part or all of an emission surface except a portion right above a fluorescent lamp 102. It is described that by promoting the emission of the illumination light by 100b, the overall thickness can be reduced and unnatural luminance unevenness of the emitted light can be reduced.
  • Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 8-62426 discloses a liquid crystal display that can realize a small and lightweight liquid crystal display device without reducing the irradiation amount of a knock light, a thinner liquid crystal display device, and a reduction in cost and power consumption.
  • a rectangular irradiation surface, a rectangular section with a rectangular section cut out in the center of the short side in parallel with the long side and for inserting a light source, and the long side sandwiching this groove There is disclosed a light guide plate having a back surface formed such that the plate thickness gradually decreases toward both side surfaces of the light guide plate.
  • Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. Hei 10-133027 discloses that a light source is arranged in order to obtain a bright backlight unit that can make the frame of a liquid crystal display device narrower and thinner, and has high light use efficiency.
  • a light guide (light guide plate) having a parabolic shape in which the cross section parallel to the width direction of the concave portion is parallel to the depth direction is disclosed.
  • Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 5-249320 discloses that in order to keep the in-plane brightness of the display panel uniform and to provide high-luminance illumination, the light is sequentially refracted on a C-shaped high reflection layer.
  • a light guide plate in which a plurality of plate-shaped optical waveguide layers are stacked so as to increase the efficiency, and the light diffusion layer is brightened by light emitted from each light emitting end face.
  • the concave portion for arranging the light source has a triangular shape.
  • the light guide plates disclosed in each of the above publications are used to reduce the thickness, size, and weight of the liquid crystal display device, reduce power consumption, and reduce costs.
  • One or a plurality of grooves are provided, and the rod-shaped light source is housed in the grooves.
  • the groove force is formed so that the plate thickness is gradually reduced toward the end face, and the thickness is reduced. I have.
  • Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-42327 discloses that in order to improve a liquid crystal backlight for a large liquid crystal display surface of a wall-mounted television, a plurality of light guide plates are arranged in parallel, and a predetermined number of light guide plates are provided between the light guide plates. By arranging the linear light source, high brightness and high uniformity, large-scale backlighting is realized.
  • Patent Document 1 Japanese Utility Model Application No. 5-4133
  • Patent Document 2 Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-304623
  • Patent Document 3 JP-A-8-62426
  • Patent Document 4 JP-A-10-133027
  • Patent Document 5 JP-A-5-249320
  • Patent Document 6 JP 2001-42327 A
  • the light output surface of the light guide plate 100 is not directly above the light source (fluorescent lamp) 102 but has a rough surface or a micro prism surface.
  • a supplementary front face 100b is formed to promote the emission of illumination light that enters the emission surface at an angle greater than the critical angle.
  • the light amount compensation front 100b The effect of improving the luminance by the light source is large. The efficiency of the use of the light source light is low. The light source light is insufficiently diffused, so that there is a problem that uniform and high-luminance light cannot be emitted.
  • a light source (fluorescent lamp) 102 is embedded in a groove 100a having a circular cross section, and as shown in FIG. Luminance peaks remain as they are. It is necessary to remove the unnatural luminance unevenness on the emission surface by using the transmitted light amount correction sheet 106, the light diffusion plate 108, and the prism sheet 110 arranged on the emission side of the plate. There is a problem that is up.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the concave portion on the groove provided in the light guide is made parabolic, so that the light guide Light is incident on the light guide where the diffusion of light in the body is almost uniform, and the efficiency of light utilization is said to be improved. V, it is considered at all! /.
  • the light guide plate disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 5-249320 has a complicated structure in which a plurality of plate-shaped optical waveguide plates are stacked, so that the brightness attenuation is reduced and uniform brightness is reduced as compared with the related art. It has the problem that the manufacturing cost is high.
  • a transmission suppression pattern for suppressing transmission of light from the linear light source is provided in order to increase the luminance immediately above the linear light source.
  • the light from the linear light source must be transmitted inside the light guide plate from one end to the other end in the in-plane direction. Was not enough.
  • a first object of the present invention is to solve the above-mentioned problems of the prior art, to be thin and light, and to have a uniform and less uneven light output surface force even when a plurality of light emitting devices are configured in parallel.
  • An object of the present invention is to provide a light guide plate capable of emitting high-luminance illumination light with high efficiency.
  • another object of the present invention is to provide a light guide plate capable of providing a light emitting surface of a larger size, in addition to the first object.
  • a second object of the present invention is to solve the above-mentioned problems of the prior art, and to make it thinner than a direct type. And can be manufactured at lower cost, can emit more uniform, less uneven, and higher-intensity illumination light, and can have a large-sized illumination surface, or Another object of the present invention is to provide a planar lighting device that can be applied to a liquid crystal display device such as a wall-mounted television.
  • a third object of the present invention is to solve the above-mentioned problems of the prior art, to be thin and lightweight, to be able to be manufactured at lower cost, to be more uniform, to have less unevenness, and to be more efficient. It is an object of the present invention to provide a liquid crystal display device which can perform bright display, can have a large-sized display screen, or can be of a wall-mounted type such as a wall-mounted television.
  • a first mode of the first aspect of the present invention is a transparent light guide plate, comprising a rectangular light exit surface, and a rectangular light exit surface.
  • a pair of thick portions parallel to one side and located at a substantially central portion of a rectangular shape; and a pair of thick portions located outside the thick portion in a direction orthogonal to the one side and formed parallel to the thick portion.
  • a pair of inclined back surfaces that form an inclined back surface that is inclined with respect to the rectangular light exit surface so that the wall thickness is reduced
  • the row groove has a cross-sectional shape in a direction perpendicular to the rectangular groove, and a leading end portion of the parallel groove is symmetrically narrowed toward the rectangular light emitting surface with respect to a center line of the parallel groove perpendicular to the rectangular light emitting surface.
  • a light guide plate in which the relationship between the angle ⁇ 1 (rad) of the inclined back surface with respect to the rectangular light exit surface and the distance W between both extreme ends satisfies ⁇ 1 XW ⁇ 200 (mm). Things.
  • a second embodiment of the first embodiment of the present invention includes a plurality of light guide plates according to the first embodiment of the first embodiment of the present invention. Another object of the present invention is to provide a light guide plate characterized in that one of the pair of thin ends is connected to each other so that the rectangular light exit surfaces are in the same direction.
  • a third embodiment of the first aspect of the present invention is directed to a third embodiment in which each of the light guide plates is used as a repeating unit and a plurality of repeating units are used. It is intended to provide a light guide plate having a structure in which the connecting portions are seamlessly integrated and arranged in parallel.
  • the shape of the cross section perpendicular to the parallel groove in the connecting portion when a plurality of the light guide plates are connected has an arc shape or a polygon shape. No.
  • the light guide plate having this shape is a repetition unit, and it is more preferable that the light guide plate has a structure in which a plurality of repetition units are seamlessly united and arranged in parallel.
  • the tip portion is a portion in which the center force of the rod-shaped light source is directed to the rectangular light emitting surface and the angle with respect to the perpendicular is 90 degrees on both sides. Is preferred.
  • the front end portion is a portion where an angle with respect to a vertical force perpendicular to the central force of the rod-shaped light source is 60 degrees on both sides. Further, it is preferable that the angle is substantially 20 degrees or more in consideration of the thickness of the light guide plate and the arrangement of the bar-shaped light sources.
  • the cross-sectional shape of at least the distal end portion of the parallel groove is a part of two straight lines or curves symmetrical with respect to the center line, each having one sharp intersection point intersecting with each other.
  • a cross-sectional shape of at least the distal end portion of the parallel groove or a cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove is a triangle.
  • the two curves which are the cross-sectional shapes of at least the distal end portion of the parallel groove, are convex or concave toward the center of the parallel groove.
  • At least the cross-sectional shape of at least the distal end portion of the parallel groove or the two curves that are the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove is convex or concave toward the center of the parallel groove, and the shape is 10 or more.
  • the curve which is preferably a curve approximated by the following function, is more preferably a part of a circle, ellipse, parabola, or hyperbola.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the top of the tip portion of the parallel groove may be between the two symmetrical straight lines.
  • the shapes are connected by a straight line or a curve symmetrical with respect to the center line before the curves intersect.
  • a cross-sectional shape of the top portion of the distal end portion of the parallel groove is a shape having a portion parallel to the rectangular light exit surface where the one sharp intersection is chamfered.
  • the cross-sectional shape of at least the tip portion of the parallel groove or the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove is triangular, and the cross-sectional shape of the top of the tip portion of the parallel groove with respect to the center line. Preferably, it has a symmetric trapezoidal shape.
  • triangles and trapezoids indicate shapes that can be seen when the open part of the groove is complemented by a straight line when the line forming the cross-section of the parallel groove is constituted by a straight line.
  • a cross-sectional shape of a top portion of the distal end portion of the parallel groove is a curved shape that is convex or concave with respect to the rectangular light emission surface and is symmetric with respect to the center line.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the top of the tip portion of the parallel groove may be a circle, an ellipse, a parabola, or a hyperbolic shape in which the one point of intersection is symmetrically rounded with respect to the center line. Preferably it is.
  • At least the cross-sectional shape of the distal end portion of the parallel groove is an elliptical shape or a part of a hyperbola.
  • the top portion of the tip portion of the parallel groove is a grit surface. Further, it is preferable that the rectangular light emitting surface has a halftone dot at a portion corresponding to the top of the tip portion of the parallel groove.
  • a surface force perpendicular to the rectangular light exit surface and including a central axis of the rod-shaped light source is a distance from the thin end portion to an end surface, L (mm), and the rod-shaped light source is ⁇ L (mm), the light transmittance of the light-transmitting resin is t%, the distance from the center of the rectangular light exit surface to the intersection with the inclined back surface is ⁇ L (mm).
  • D (mm) the distance to the rectangular light emitting surface in a direction perpendicular to the light emitting surface
  • the total light flux on the light exit surface when the incident light is emitted from the rod-like light source is represented by I I.
  • relative illuminance or relative illuminance formed by the emission light of the rod-like light source housed in the parallel groove in a first portion corresponding to the parallel groove of the rectangular light emitting surface, relative illuminance or relative illuminance formed by the emission light of the rod-like light source housed in the parallel groove.
  • the peak value of relative brightness The cross section of the parallel groove in the orthogonal direction so that the relative brightness or the average value of relative brightness formed by the emitted light in the second portion corresponding to the inclined back surface portion is 3 times or less.
  • a tip end portion of the parallel groove is symmetrically narrowed toward the rectangular light emission surface with respect to a center line of the parallel groove perpendicular to the rectangular light emission surface.
  • the peak of the relative illuminance or relative luminance of the first portion of the rectangular light exit surface is preferably 3 times or less of the average value of the relative illuminance or relative luminance of the second portion, and is preferably 2 times or less. Is more preferable.
  • the parallel groove has a cross-sectional shape in the orthogonal direction. It is preferable that the parallel groove is designed so that the leading end of the parallel groove is symmetrically narrowed toward the rectangular light emitting surface with respect to a center line perpendicular to the rectangular light emitting surface.
  • the parallel light is adjusted so that a peak value of relative illuminance or relative luminance of the first portion of the rectangular light exit surface is three times or less of an average value of relative illuminance or relative luminance of the second portion.
  • U It is preferable to design the groove tip symmetrically thin.
  • a second aspect of the present invention is directed to the first aspect.
  • the light guide plate further includes a diffusion sheet disposed on the rectangular light emission surface of the light guide plate, and is disposed between the rectangular light emission surface of the light guide plate and the diffusion sheet. It is preferable to have a prism sheet.
  • relative illuminance or relative luminance formed by emission light of a rod-like light source force housed in the parallel groove is the ratio between the rectangular light emitting surface of the light guide plate and the diffusion sheet. It is preferable that the distance is set in accordance with the interval allowed between the two or the thickness allowed in the planar lighting device.
  • a third aspect of the present invention is directed to a backlight unit which also has the surface illumination device power of the second aspect, and a light exit surface of the backlight unit.
  • the present invention provides a liquid crystal display device comprising: a liquid crystal display panel disposed on a side thereof; and a drive unit for driving the backlight unit and the liquid crystal display panel.
  • the light guide plate can be made thinner and lighter than before, and By satisfying the relational force ⁇ 1 XW ⁇ 200 (mm) between the angle ⁇ 1 (rad) of the inclined surface with respect to the exit surface and the distance W between the two extreme ends, the light exit surface force is more uniform and uneven. It is possible to emit less and higher brightness illumination light.
  • the peak of illuminance or luminance can be reduced, and the illuminance or luminance at the light exit surface can be further improved.
  • the uniformity can be achieved, and the uniformity required for the light exit surface can be achieved.
  • the size of the light exit surface of the light guide plate can be further increased. It can be large.
  • the size of the light exit surface of the light guide plate is reduced. It is possible to increase the size and to suppress the generation of bright lines at the connecting part. A part of the light is emitted by the adjacent repetitive unit force, so that the change of the light emission amount near the connection part is suppressed.
  • the light guide plate of the first aspect can be manufactured to be thinner and lighter, can be manufactured at lower cost, and can be made more uniform and uneven.
  • a liquid crystal lighting device which can perform display with less unevenness and higher brightness, can have a large display screen, or can be a wall-mounted type such as a wall-mounted television. be able to.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a configuration in which a plurality of light guide plates of the present invention are arranged in parallel.
  • FIG. 2A and 2B are a schematic perspective view and a schematic sectional view, respectively, of a liquid crystal display device using a backlight unit having the light guide plate of the present invention
  • FIG. 2C is a schematic sectional view of the light guide plate. It is.
  • FIG. 3A is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a state in which a prism sheet is disposed between a reflection sheet and an inclined surface of a light guide plate
  • FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic plan view and a schematic cross-sectional view of the prism sheet disposed therebetween viewed from the light guide plate side. is there.
  • FIG. 4A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view near the extreme end when the cross-sectional shape near the extreme end of the inclined surface to which the light guide plates are connected when a plurality of light guide plates are connected is curved.
  • Fig.4B is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view near the extreme end when the cross-sectional shape near the extreme end of the inclined surface where the light guide plates are connected when a plurality of light guide plates are connected is polygonal. is there.
  • FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the principle of light emission of the light guide plate of the present invention.
  • FIG. 6A to 6E are graphs each showing a luminance distribution on a light emitting surface of a light guide plate when three light guide plates are connected.
  • FIG. 6A to 6E are graphs each showing a luminance distribution on a light emitting surface of a light guide plate when three light guide plates are connected.
  • FIG. 7 is a graph collectively showing the graphs of FIGS. 6A to 6E.
  • FIGS. 8A to 8D show three light guide plates in which the angle ⁇ 2 of the inclined surface with respect to the light exit surface at the connecting portion is smaller than the angle ⁇ 1 of the inclined surface other than the connecting portion.
  • 5 is a graph of a luminance distribution on the light exit surface of FIG.
  • FIG. 9 is a diagram collectively showing the graphs shown in FIGS. 8A to 8D.
  • FIG. 10A to FIG. 10E are graphs showing luminance distribution on a light exit surface when six light guide plates are connected.
  • FIG. 11 is a diagram collectively showing the graphs shown in FIGS. 10A to 10E.
  • FIG. 12A to FIG. 12C are graphs showing a luminance distribution on a light exit surface when nine light guide plates are connected.
  • FIGS. 13D and 13E are graphs showing the brightness distribution on the light exit surface when nine light guide plates are connected, where the inclination angles are different from the graphs shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C. It is.
  • FIG. 14 is a view collectively showing the graphs shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C, FIG. 13D, and FIG. 13E.
  • FIG. 15 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the light guide plate when the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the length direction of the parallel groove is hyperbolic.
  • FIG. 16 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the light guide plate when the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the length direction of the parallel groove is elliptical.
  • FIG. 17 shows that the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the length direction of the parallel groove passes through the center of the parallel groove and guides the light.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a light guide plate formed by partially forming two arc curves symmetric with respect to a center line perpendicular to a light exit surface of the plate.
  • Figure 18 shows a part of two parabolas whose cross section perpendicular to the length direction of the parallel groove is symmetrical with respect to the center line passing through the center of the parallel groove and perpendicular to the light exit surface of the light guide plate.
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic sectional view of a light guide plate formed by force.
  • FIG. 19 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a light guide plate in which a cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the length direction of a parallel groove is formed with two curved forces convex toward the center of the parallel groove.
  • FIG. 20 shows that the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the length direction of the parallel groove has a curved force formed by combining a convex curve and a concave curve toward the center of the parallel groove. It is a schematic sectional view.
  • FIG. 21 is an example of a halftone dot pattern formed on the light exit surface side of a light guide plate.
  • FIG. 22 is a graph showing the illuminance distribution of light emitted from the light exit surface of the light guide plate when the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove of the light guide plate is changed to various shapes.
  • FIG. 23 is a graph showing the illuminance distribution of light emitted from the light guide plate when the deepest portion of the parallel groove is flattened and the length of the flat portion is changed to various values. It is a graph shown.
  • FIGS. 24A to 24D are schematic cross-sectional views of the light guide plate when the flat portions at the deepest portions of the parallel grooves are 1.5 mm, 1. Omm, 0.5 mm, and 0.25 mm, respectively. It is.
  • FIG. 25 is a graph showing the light exit surface force of the light guide plate when the shape of the deepest portion of the parallel groove is a curved surface having a radius of curvature R and the radius of curvature of the curved surface is changed to various values. It is a graph which shows illuminance distribution.
  • FIGS. 26A to 26D are schematic diagrams of light guide plates when the radii of curvature at the apexes of parallel grooves having a triangular cross section are 0.25 mm, 0.5 mm, 1.0 mm, and 1.5 mm, respectively. It is sectional drawing.
  • FIG. 27A is a configuration example in which a reflector is disposed on the side surface of the light guide plate of the present invention
  • FIG. 27B is a configuration example in which the reflector is disposed on the side surface of the light guide plate when the light guide plates of the present invention are arranged in parallel. This is an example of the configuration in which they are arranged.
  • FIG. 28 is a schematic configuration diagram of a housing for housing the knock light unit.
  • FIG. 29 is a schematic oblique view of a housing accommodating a backlight unit and a liquid crystal display panel.
  • FIG. 30 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a housing containing a backlight unit and a liquid crystal display panel.
  • FIG. 31 is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view of both ends of the housing shown in FIG. 30.
  • FIG. 32A is a schematic sectional view showing an example of a light source used in the backlight unit of the present invention
  • FIG. 32B is a schematic perspective view showing an example of a light source positioning means
  • FIG. FIG. 32B is a schematic sectional view of the light source shown in FIG. 32A and FIG. 32B.
  • FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram of a light guide plate in which ribs are formed in parallel grooves to prevent a light source from being in direct contact with the parallel grooves.
  • FIG. 34A and FIG. 34B are a plan view and a side view schematically showing a configuration in which a reflection sheet and a light guide plate including a light source are integrated, respectively.
  • FIG. 34C is a CC line of FIG. 34A.
  • FIG. 34D is a view taken in the direction of the arrow, and
  • FIG. 34D is a view taken in the direction of the arrow DD in FIG. 34A.
  • FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a halftone sheet having halftone dots formed thereon is arranged so as to cover the light exit surfaces of a plurality of connected light guide plates.
  • FIG. 36A is a configuration example of a light guide plate of the present invention in which a reflector is disposed on a side surface in the longitudinal direction of a light source
  • FIG. 36B is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 36A.
  • FIG. 37A is a schematic perspective view showing another example of the light guide plate of the present invention
  • FIG. 37B is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 37A
  • FIG. 37C is a sectional view taken along line C—B of FIG. 37A
  • FIG. 37D is a sectional view taken along line C-D
  • FIG. 37D is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 37A.
  • FIG. 38 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing another example of a light guide plate in which a plurality of light guide plates having different widths are connected.
  • FIG. 39 is a schematic sectional view showing an example of a light guide plate having a light exit surface having an R shape.
  • FIG. 40A is a schematic cross-sectional view showing an example of a shape in which the end of the light guide plate in the longitudinal direction of the light source has an inclination.
  • FIG. 40B is parallel to the light exit surface and in the longitudinal direction of the light source.
  • FIG. 40C is a schematic perspective view showing an example of a shape in which the end of the light guide plate in a direction perpendicular to FIG. 40 is inclined, and
  • FIG. 40C is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 40B.
  • FIG. 41A is a schematic perspective view showing an example of a light guide plate having a gentle curved surface in which a light emitting surface has a curved cross-sectional shape in the longitudinal direction of a light source.
  • FIG. 41B is a light emitting surface.
  • Light source FIG. 4 is a schematic perspective view showing an example of a light guide plate having a rib with a minute height extending in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction.
  • FIG. 42 is a schematic perspective view of the knock light unit as viewed from the rear side.
  • FIG. 43 is a schematic sectional view of a surface light source device having a conventional light guide plate.
  • FIG. 44 is a graph of luminance at an emission surface of a light guide plate of the surface light source device of FIG. 43.
  • a light guide plate, a planar lighting device and a liquid crystal display device using the same according to the present invention will be described in detail below based on preferred embodiments shown in the accompanying drawings.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a planar lighting device 1 (hereinafter, also referred to as a backlight unit) according to a second embodiment of the present invention in which a plurality of light guide plates 18 according to the first embodiment of the present invention are arranged in parallel. The figure is shown.
  • a planar illumination device 2 is used as a knock light cut of the liquid crystal display device according to the third embodiment of the present invention.
  • FIGS. 2A and 2B are a schematic partial perspective view and a schematic partial cross-sectional view of a portion of one light guide plate 18 of the backlight unit 2 shown in FIG. 1 and a liquid crystal display device 10 using the backlight unit 2. Show.
  • FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a planar lighting device 1 (hereinafter, also referred to as a backlight unit) according to a second embodiment of the present invention in which a plurality of light guide plates 18 according to the first embodiment of the present invention are arranged in parallel. The figure is shown.
  • the liquid crystal display device 10 basically includes a backlight unit 2, a liquid crystal display panel 4 arranged on the light emission surface side of the backlight unit 2, and a drive unit for driving the liquid crystal display panel 4.
  • Drive unit 6 The knock light unit 2 includes a cold cathode tube 12, a diffusion sheet 14, prism sheets 16, 17, a light guide plate 18, a reflector 20, and a reflection plate 22.
  • the liquid crystal display panel 4 includes, for example, GH, PC, TN, STN, ECB, PDLC, IPS (In-Plane Switching), VA (Vertical).
  • GH GH
  • PC TN
  • STN STN
  • ECB PDLC
  • IPS In-Plane Switching
  • VA Vertical
  • Various types of liquid crystal display panels (MVA, PVA, EVA), OCB, ferroelectric liquid crystal, antiferroelectric liquid crystal, and other liquid crystal display modes can be used.
  • the driving method of the liquid crystal display panel 4 is not particularly limited, and a known driving method such as a simple matrix method or an active matrix method can be used.
  • the backlight unit 2 is a planar illumination device for irradiating the entire surface of the liquid crystal display panel 4 with uniform light from behind the liquid crystal display panel 4. It has substantially the same light emitting surface (light emitting surface). As shown in FIGS. 2A to 2C, the backlight unit 2 basically includes a light source 12, a diffusion sheet 14, two prism sheets 16 and 17, a light guide plate 18, a reflector 20, And a reflection sheet 22.
  • the method of driving the backlight unit 2 is not particularly limited.
  • the backlight unit 2 may be driven so as to monitor the surrounding environment and perform luminance modulation.
  • the luminance may be modulated according to the brightness or the temperature by providing an external light sensor to detect the surrounding brightness, or by providing a temperature sensor to detect the surrounding temperature.
  • the driving method of the knock light unit 2 is not particularly limited.
  • R (red), G (green), and B (blue) light sources for example, LED light sources
  • It may be driven by a field sequential method in which the liquid crystal display panel 4 is sequentially turned on in accordance with the display, or may be driven by an intermittent lighting method in which light is emitted or turned off sequentially or simultaneously with the scanning display of the liquid crystal. If the backlight unit 2 is driven using the field sequential method, the R, G, and B color filters can be removed, so that the loss of light amount due to the color filters can be eliminated. In addition, if the light source is turned on for a short time according to the intermittent lighting method, it is possible to improve the display performance of moving images.
  • the above-mentioned constituent members constituting the knock light unit 2 are arranged in a housing 280 as shown in FIG. 28, and are fixed from the rear side of the knock light unit 2 to be integrated. It may be configured as a single unit. As shown in FIG. 28, the housing 280 has a box-shaped structure with one surface opened, and a rectangular opening is formed on the side where the light emission surface of the backlight unit is located. I have.
  • Examples of such a housing 280 include a box-shaped housing made of resin or metal, a frame of a skeleton structure made of metal, and a box-shaped structure made of a rigid resin other than metal. And a frame having a skeletal structure, a metal and a rigid resin, and a rib having a rib extending in a direction perpendicular to the parallel groove of the light guide plate 18.
  • FIG. 28 shows a configuration in which the constituent members of the backlight unit 2 are disposed in the housing 280, but a configuration in which the backlight unit and the liquid crystal display panel are disposed in one housing. It may be.
  • Fig. 29 to Fig. 31 show the configuration examples of the housing that houses the knock light unit and the liquid crystal display panel.
  • FIG. 29 is a schematic perspective view of a housing 290 accommodating a knock light unit (not shown) and the liquid crystal display panel 4, and
  • FIG. 30 is a housing accommodating the backlight unit 2 and the liquid crystal display panel.
  • 290 is a schematic sectional view of FIG.
  • FIG. 31 is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view of both ends of the housing 290 shown in FIG.
  • the housing that houses the knock light unit and the liquid crystal display panel has a configuration in which the backlight unit is housed in a dedicated housing, and the backlight unit and the liquid crystal display panel that are housed in the housing for the backlight unit are housed.
  • the knock light unit and the liquid crystal display panel may be fixed and accommodated without accommodating the knock light unit in the housing for the backlight unit.
  • the light source 12 is a small-diameter rod-shaped cold cathode tube, and is used to illuminate the liquid crystal display panel 4.
  • the light source 12 is arranged in a parallel groove 18f formed in the light guide plate 18, and is connected to the drive unit 6.
  • a cold cathode tube is used as the light source 12, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any rod-shaped light source may be used.
  • a light source such as a normal fluorescent tube, a cold cathode tube, a hot cathode tube, an external electrode tube, a light emitting diode (LED), or a semiconductor laser can be used.
  • a light emitting diode is preferred.
  • a cylindrical or prismatic transparent light guide having the same length as the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18 is used, and an LED light source having LEDs arranged on the top and bottom surfaces of the light guide is used as the light source 12. It may be used instead. In such an LED light source, the light of the LED can be incident from the top and bottom surfaces of the light guide, and the lateral force of the light guide can also emit the LED light.
  • an aperture-type lamp as shown in FIG. 32A may be used as the light source.
  • an aperture-type lamp is provided with a high-reflectance member at a portion other than an angle at which light is to be emitted, that is, a high-reflectance member is provided at a portion where light is not emitted, and a predetermined angle is provided.
  • FIG. 32C shows a cross-sectional view of an aperture-type lamp. In FIG. 32C, the area 320 emits light. Area.
  • various materials such as metal and nonmetal can be used as the member having high reflectance, and it is particularly preferable to use nonmetal material.
  • nonmetal material By using a nonmetallic material as a member having a high reflectivity, the leakage current can be reduced.
  • a positioning means in at least one place.
  • a bent portion 322 is provided in the terminal portion of the lamp, a groove 326 is formed in the support member 324 for supporting the lamp, and the bent portion 322 is formed in the groove 326 of the support member 324.
  • the angle of the bent portion 322 provided in the terminal portion of the lamp may be any angle as long as it can be specified with respect to the parallel groove of the light guide plate. It is preferable that the bent portion 322 is provided so that the light emission region 320 of one type of lamp is bisected.
  • the shape of the bent portion can be any shape that can fix the position of the lamp and the direction of arrangement of the member having high reflectivity with respect to the parallel groove and does not hinder the arrangement in the parallel groove. Any shape is acceptable.
  • the center of the opening of the light source can be easily aligned with the center of the parallel groove of the light guide plate, and light can be efficiently incident on the light guide plate.
  • the light source 12 and the parallel groove 18f formed in the light guide plate 18 are directly connected.
  • the light source 12 may be disposed in the parallel groove 18 of the light guide plate 18f by partially providing a rib 330 or the like in the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18 so as not to make contact.
  • Such a rib 330 may have, for example, a convex shape with a width of lmm or less and a height of about 0.5 mm, and may be formed in a parallel groove of the light guide plate. It is preferable to provide a part in the direction of the center line of 18f.
  • an opening may be provided on the side surface of the backlight unit corresponding to an extension of the parallel groove of the light guide plate 18 in the center line direction, and the light source 12 may be exchanged through the opening.
  • the reflection sheet 22 is formed of a rigid metal material or a resin material, and the reflection sheet 22 and the light guide plate 18 including the light source 12 are integrated. It is preferable to adopt a sloping configuration. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 34A to 34D, one of the light guide plate 18 and the reflection sheet 22 is provided with a concave portion and the other is provided with a convex portion, and is fitted or fixed with screws. Alternatively, the light guide plate 18 and the reflection sheet 22 may be integrally formed.
  • the reflection sheet 22 is formed of a metal material in order to secure sufficient rigidity with respect to the thinning of the knock light unit, a floating capacitance occurs depending on the combination of the metal material and the cold cathode tube. It is known. On the other hand, stray capacitance can be reduced by providing an elongated hole in the portion of the reflection sheet that faces the cold cathode tube.
  • the diffusion sheet 14 is for diffusing the light emitted from the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 to make it uniform, for example, PET (polyethylene terephthalate), Optically transparent, such as PP (polypropylene), PC (polycarbonate), PMMA (polymethinolemethacrylate), benzyl methacrylate, MS resin, other acrylic resins, or COP (cycloolefin polymer) It is formed by giving light diffusivity to a flat member made of a resin.
  • PET polyethylene terephthalate
  • Optically transparent such as PP (polypropylene), PC (polycarbonate), PMMA (polymethinolemethacrylate), benzyl methacrylate, MS resin, other acrylic resins, or COP (cycloolefin polymer) It is formed by giving light diffusivity to a flat member made of a resin.
  • the method is not particularly limited, for example, the surface of the above-mentioned plate-shaped member is subjected to surface roughening by fine irregularity processing or polishing (hereinafter, the surface subjected to these treatments is referred to as “sand rubbing surface”) to impart diffusivity.
  • a pigment such as silica, titanium oxide, zinc oxide or the like, or beads such as resin glass, zirconia, etc., which scatter light on the surface, is coated with a binder, or light is scattered in the resin described above. It is formed by kneading the aforementioned pigments and beads.
  • the diffusion sheet 14 a diffusion sheet of a mat type or a coating type can be used.
  • the diffusion sheet 14 it is also preferable to use a film-like member having a thickness of 500 ⁇ m or less, which is made of the above-mentioned material and has light diffusing properties.
  • the diffusion sheet 14 is preferably disposed at a predetermined distance from the light exit surface 18 a of the light guide plate 18, and the distance is appropriately determined according to the light amount distribution from the light exit surface 18 a of the light guide plate 18. Can change.
  • the diffusion sheet 14 By separating the diffusion sheet 14 from the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 by a predetermined distance in this way, the light force emitted from the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 can be changed between the light exit surface 18a and the diffusion sheet 14. Further mixing (mixing). Thereby, the illuminance of the light passing through the diffusion sheet 14 and illuminating the liquid crystal display panel 4 can be made more uniform.
  • a method of separating the diffusion sheet 14 from the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 by a predetermined distance for example, a method of providing a spacer between the diffusion sheet 14 and the light guide plate 18 can be used.
  • the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 corresponding to the parallel groove 18f may be formed depending on the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18. It is not necessary to sufficiently reduce the peak value of the illuminance, and the light emitted from the diffusion sheet 14 is provided by providing a gap between the diffusion sheet 14 and the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18. The light may have a uniform illuminance distribution.
  • the prism sheets 16 and 17 are transparent sheets formed by arranging a plurality of prisms in parallel.
  • the prism sheets 16 and 17 increase the light condensing property of light emitted from the light exit surface 18 a of the light guide plate 18 and increase the brightness. Can be improved.
  • One of the prism sheets 16 and 17 is arranged so that the direction in which the prism rows extend is parallel to the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18, and the other is arranged so as to be vertical. That is, the prism sheets 16 and 17 are arranged so that the directions in which the prism rows extend are perpendicular to each other.
  • the prism sheet 16 is disposed such that the apex angle of the prism faces the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18.
  • the arrangement order of the prism sheets 16 and 17 is such that a prism sheet 16 having a prism extending in a direction parallel to the parallel groove of the light guide plate is arranged immediately above the light guide plate, and the prism sheet is arranged.
  • a prism sheet having a prism extending in a direction perpendicular to the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18 may be arranged on the light guide plate 16, or vice versa.
  • a prism sheet is used, but a sheet in which optical elements similar to prisms are regularly arranged may be used instead of the prism sheet.
  • a sheet regularly provided with an element having a lens effect for example, an optical element such as a lenticular lens, a concave lens, a convex lens, or a pyramid type can be used instead of the prism sheet.
  • FIGS. 3A and 3B a prism sheet 19 is further provided between the reflection sheet 22 and the inclined surface 18d of the light guide plate 18 opposite to the light exit surface 18a.
  • FIG. 3A is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a state in which a prism sheet 19 is arranged between the reflection sheet 22 and the inclined surface 18d of the light guide plate 18, and
  • FIG. 3B is a sectional view of the reflection sheet 22 and the light guide plate 18.
  • FIG. 9 is a schematic plan view and a schematic cross-sectional view of the prism sheet 19 disposed between the inclined surface 18d and the light guide plate when viewed from the side of the light guide plate.
  • the prism sheet 19 provided between the reflection sheet 22 and the inclined surface 18d of the light guide plate 18 is arranged so that the direction in which the prism 19a extends is perpendicular to the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18, and It is preferable that the apex angle of 19a is arranged so as to face the inclined surface 18d of the light guide plate 18.
  • an optical element having a lens effect that can be obtained by using an optical element having the same effect as the prism sheet for example, an optical element such as a lenticular lens, a concave lens, a convex lens, or a pyramid type A sheet in which elements are regularly arranged may be provided.
  • the prism sheets 16 and 17, and more preferably the prism sheet 19, are used.However, when the illuminance on the light exit surface 18a by the parallel grooves 18f of the light guide plate 18 is more uniform, Of course, the prism sheet 19 is unnecessary, and one or both of the prism sheets 16 and 17 need not be used.
  • the apparatus cost can be reduced by reducing the number of expensive prism sheets used or by omitting the use of prism sheets.
  • the reflection sheet 22 reflects light leaking from the rear surface (the lower surface in the figure) of the light guide plate 18 and makes the light enter the light guide plate 18 again. Usage efficiency can be improved.
  • the reflection sheet 22 is formed so as to cover the lower surface (inclined surface) of the light guide plate 18.
  • the reflector 20 is provided behind the light source 12 so as to close the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18. The reflector 20 reflects the light of the lower surface of the light source 12 as well as the light of the side wall surface of the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18.
  • the reflection sheet 22 may be made of any material as long as it can reflect light leaking from the back surface (the lower surface in the figure) of the light guide plate 18, for example, PET or PP ( A resin sheet in which the reflectance is increased by forming voids by kneading a filler into (polypropylene) or the like, and a sheet in which a mirror surface is formed on the surface of a transparent or white resin sheet by aluminum evaporation or the like as described above; It can be formed of a metal foil of aluminum or the like, a resin sheet carrying the metal foil, or a metal thin plate having a sufficiently reflective surface. Further, the reflector 20 can be formed of, for example, the same material as the above-mentioned reflection sheet, that is, a resin material, a metal foil or a metal plate having a surface with sufficient reflectivity.
  • the reflection sheet may be directly attached to a portion of the light guide plate opposite to the light exit surface except for the parallel groove, for example, an inclined surface.
  • the present invention is not limited to directly applying the reflection sheet to the light guide plate, and a paint having the same function as the reflection sheet may be directly applied to the light guide plate.
  • the emission efficiency can be improved, and the occurrence of luminance unevenness due to a mounting error of the reflection sheet can be prevented.
  • the backlight unit in the present invention is not limited to the configuration shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B.
  • a reflective polarizing film in order to improve the brightness of light emitted from light guide plate 18, a reflective polarizing film
  • a brightness enhancement sheet such as a cholesteric polarizing film or a scattering polarizing film may be provided.
  • such a brightness enhancement sheet is preferably disposed between the light guide plate 18 and the liquid crystal display panel 4 (lower polarizer), particularly, for the liquid crystal display panel 4 (lower polarizer). It is preferable to dispose it on the surface on the light incident side.
  • an optical compensation film for widening the viewing angle may be provided.
  • the optical compensation film for example, an optical compensation film using a discotic liquid crystal / nematic liquid crystal, an optical compensation film using a collimating film, or the like can be used.
  • the optical compensation film is shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B. It is preferable to be provided by being attached to the upper surface or the lower surface of the nozzle 4.
  • an optical member having a function such as diffusion, light collection, scattering, or diffraction is connected to the light exit side of the light guide plate 18 in FIGS. 2A and 2B, for example, the light exit surface of the light guide plate 18 or the light guide plate 18.
  • the liquid crystal display panel 4. As such an optical component, only one optical component having any one of the above functions may be arranged, or a plurality of optical members having the same or different functions may be arranged in combination. When a plurality of optical components are used in combination, the order of arrangement of the plurality of optical components is arbitrary, and the order of arrangement can be appropriately adjusted according to desired optical characteristics.
  • Each of the above-described optical members such as the diffusion film, the prism sheet, and the brightness enhancement sheet may be used one by one or a plurality of them. Further, such optical members can be used by being bonded to each other. Further, it can be attached directly to the light guide plate, or it can be attached to the light incident side surface of the liquid crystal display panel. Further, the arrangement of the prism sheet is not particularly limited. For example, when the light emission direction is upward, the prism may be disposed upward !, or may be disposed downward, and two prisms may be disposed. It is used to stack sheets.
  • the optical components such as the diffusion sheet 14 and the prism sheets 16 and 17 are arranged.
  • the configuration of the optical component is not limited to such a configuration example, and may be, for example, a configuration as described below.
  • a diffusion sheet in which halftone dots for suppressing generation of bright lines are formed by printing, a prism sheet, and the above-described brightness improvement sheet are sequentially arranged. can do.
  • halftone dots are formed on the light incident side surface of the diffusion sheet, that is, the surface facing the light exit surface of the light guide plate, and the prism row is arranged on the light exit side in the prism sheet. Is preferred.
  • a configuration can be adopted in which a diffusion sheet in which halftone dots are formed by printing and a brightness enhancement sheet are arranged on the light exit surface side of the light guide plate.
  • a halftone dot is formed on the light incident side surface of the diffusion sheet as described above.
  • a halftone dot is formed by printing on the light exit surface of the light guide plate, and a diffusion sheet and a brightness enhancement sheet are arranged in this order on the light exit surface side of the light guide plate. You can also.
  • halftone dots are formed on the light exit surface of the light guide plate, halftone dots are formed, and a diffusion sheet is used.
  • halftone dots are formed on the light exit surface of the light guide plate by printing, and two diffusion sheets having the same or different characteristics and one brightness enhancement sheet are provided on the light exit surface side of the light guide plate. May be arranged in order. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which two diffusion sheets and one brightness enhancement sheet are sequentially arranged on the light exit surface side of the light guide plate. In this case, halftone dots are not printed on the light exit surface of the light guide plate, but are printed on the surface of the diffusion sheet located closer to the light guide plate, facing the light exit surface of the light guide plate. It is preferable to form by.
  • halftone dots are formed on the light exit surface of the light guide plate by printing, and a diffusion sheet and a diffusion sheet are provided on the light exit surface side of the light guide plate.
  • a configuration in which the brightness enhancement sheets are arranged in this order is preferable.
  • the light guide plate 18 is formed with a rectangular light exit surface 18a, a pair of thick portions 18b parallel to one side thereof, and on both sides of the thick portions 18b parallel to the one side.
  • 18b has a parallel groove 18f formed in parallel with the one side and for accommodating the light source 12. That is, the light guide plate 18 is a plate-like member having a rectangular outer shape on the surface, and is formed of transparent resin.
  • the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 is flat, and the surface on the opposite side is inclined with respect to the light exit surface 18a so that the thickness of the light guide plate 18 becomes smaller in accordance with the direction of one side.
  • the distance from the surface X perpendicular to the light exit surface 18a and including the central axis O of the light source 12 to the end surface 18h of the thin portion is determined.
  • L [mm] a linear light source is arranged in the parallel groove, and the total luminous flux on the light exit surface when light incident from the linear light source exits from the light exit surface is I, and the total luminous flux on the light source surface is I Then, L is
  • it is formed to be within the range.
  • the lower limit value of I / ⁇ which indicates the emission efficiency, is the average value required for PC monitors and LCD TVs.
  • the brightness and the upper limit are determined from the viewpoint of Fresnel loss at the light guide plate interface, transmittance of the light guide plate, and reflectivity of the reflective film.
  • the ratio is 0.6 ⁇ 1 / ⁇ ⁇ 0.8.
  • K2 is a parameter that represents the shape of the light guide path.From the viewpoint of the average luminance required for PC monitors and liquid crystal TVs, k2 should be 1 ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2 ⁇ 160, and 9 ⁇ k2 ⁇ 40. Is preferable.
  • a desired light flux can be obtained by forming the light guide plate with the L obtained in this manner.
  • the inclined surface 18d of the light guide plate 18 has a relational force of 1 between the inclined angle ⁇ 1 with respect to the light exit surface 18a and the distance W between the two extreme ends 18h.
  • a plurality of light guide plates 18 having an angle in such a range are connected so that the end surfaces 18h of the thin end portions 18c are in close contact with each other to form a light guide having a large light exit surface.
  • the light of the cold cathode tube 12 incident from the light incident portion 18g of the parallel groove 18f is reflected by the inclined surface 18d inside the light guide plate 18, then exits from the light exit surface 18a, and the brightness unevenness at the connection portion is obtained. Can be reduced.
  • the angle of inclination ⁇ 1 is such that the light emitted from the cold cathode tube partially reflects inside the light guide plate 18 and propagates the light to the connecting portion, and the ratio of the relative luminance to the light incident portion is less than twice.
  • the inclination angle ⁇ 2 is set to satisfy ⁇ 1> ⁇ 2 in order to increase the relative brightness at the connection portion to 3 times or less, preferably 2 times or less of the average brightness ratio. It is preferable to satisfy the conditions.
  • the connecting portion is a curved surface as shown in Fig. 4 ⁇ , the angle between the connecting portion and the tangential direction is ⁇ 2.
  • a plurality of light guide plates 18 in which the inclined surfaces 18d of the light guide plates 18 are formed as flat surfaces are connected.
  • the cross-sectional shape near the extreme end (hereinafter, referred to as the inclined end) of the inclined surface 18d where the light guide plates are connected to each other when the light guide plates are connected to each other is formed into a curved shape or a polygonal shape as shown in FIGS.4A and 4B. It is preferable that the inclined surface 18d of one light guide plate 18A is continuously connected to the inclined surface 18d of the other light guide plate 18B.
  • the connecting portion 120 on the surface opposite to the light exit surface 18a of each of the light guide plates 18A and B is used.
  • the inclination angle with respect to the light exit surface 18a is set to zero, and the inclination surface 18d other than the vicinity of the connecting portion 120 is preferably set so as to fall within the range of the inclination angle.
  • the polygon may include a curve.
  • the connecting portion 120 is formed of a plane whose angle with respect to the light exit surface 18a is gradually inclined from zero, and that the inclined surface 18d other than the connecting portion 120 is formed so as to be in the range of the above-mentioned inclined angle.
  • the angle at the connecting portion 120 formed by the inclined surface near the extreme end of each of the inclined surfaces 18d of the light guide plates 18A and 18B may be zero. It is sufficient that the angle is gentler than the angle of the surface.
  • the relationship between the inclination angle ⁇ 1 of the inclined surface 18d of the light guide plate 18 and the distance W between the two extreme ends satisfies 1 [ rad ] XW [mm] ⁇ 200 [mm]. are doing.
  • the backlight unit is configured by arranging a plurality of such light guide plates 18 in parallel, a part of the light emitted from the cold cathode tubes 12 provided in the parallel grooves 18f of the predetermined light guide plate 18A is After being reflected by the inclined surface 18d inside A, the light reaches the end face 18h of the light guide plate 18A. So Then, the light enters the interior of the light guide plate 18B from the end surface 18h of the adjacent light guide plate 18B connected to the end surface 18h, and exits from the light exit surface 18a of the adjacent light guide plate 18B.
  • a plurality of light guide plates 18 are continuously arranged in this way, and light from the cold cathode tubes 12 arranged on the adjacent light guide plate 18 can also be used. As a result, the light emission efficiency can be increased.
  • the structure of the integrated repeating unit has an advantage that a more uniform luminance can be obtained because an increase in the intensity of the bright line at each end when the repeating unit is continued without being integrated. .
  • the cross-sectional shape of the light guide plate 18 adjacent to each other at the end opposite to the light exit surface 18a is formed into a curved shape or a polygonal shape as shown in FIG. 4A and FIG. The generation of luminance in the portion can be further suppressed.
  • the diameter of the cold cathode tube 12 is 3 mm
  • the width of the light guide plate 18 perpendicular to the axis of the cold cathode tube 12 is 30 mm
  • the maximum thickness of the thick portion 18b is 5.5 mm
  • the thickness of T was changed to 1. Omm, 1.5 mm, 2. Omm, 2.5 mm, 3. Omm.
  • the graphs shown in FIGS. 6A to 6E show the light emission surface when the thickness T of the outermost portion 18i is 1.Omm, 1.5 mm, 2.Omm, 2.5 mm, and 3.Omm, respectively. 6 is a graph of luminance at.
  • the light guide plate having a thickness T force of 1.Omm, 1.5mm, 2.Omm, 2.5mm, 3.Omm at the end 18i has an inclination angle ⁇ 1 of the inclined surface of FIG. 380 [rad] (about 21.8 °), about 0.335 [rad] (about 19.2 °;), about 0.390 [rad] (about 16.6 °;), about 0.246 [ rad] (about 14.1 °) and about 0.204 [rad] (about 11.7 °).
  • the luminance on the vertical axis represents a value obtained by converting the luminance of the cold cathode fluorescent lamp to 1 lumen
  • the horizontal axis represents a value in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the cold cathode fluorescent lamp.
  • the distance between the three light guide plates The distance from the axis of the cold cathode tube provided on the central light guide plate is shown.
  • Fig. 7 summarizes the graphs shown in Figs. 6A to 6E into one to show how the emission line changes according to the angle of the inclined surface, that is, to clearly show the dependence of the emission line on the inclination angle. Shown.
  • FIGS. 8A to 8D show the angle ⁇ 2 of the inclined surface with respect to the light exit surface at the connecting portion.
  • ⁇ 2 is set to ⁇ 1 ⁇ 2, so that the angle ⁇ 1 of the inclined surface other than the connecting portion is larger than ⁇ 1.
  • FIGS. 8A to 8D show the results when the thickness T of the outermost end 18i of the light guide plate 18 is set to 1.0 mm, 1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, and 2.5 mm, respectively.
  • FIG. 9 shows how the bright line changes according to the angle of the inclined surface, that is, the graphs shown in FIGS.
  • 8A to 8D are combined into one in order to clearly show the inclination angle dependence of the bright line. Indicated. Also in this case, as in the above, a bright line is generated at the connection portion of the light guide plate, and as the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the light guide plate becomes gentler, the brightness at the connection portion becomes lower, and the brightness unevenness is reduced. It can be seen that it has been reduced.
  • the thickness of the combination of the cold cathode fluorescent lamp (CCFL) and the light guide plate can be 5 mm or less, and the thickness of the backlight unit (BLU) can be 10 mm or less. It is possible to reduce the thickness of the direct-type backlight unit, which has the above-mentioned performance, to a thickness of 20 to 30 mm.
  • FIGS. 10A to 10E show graphs of the luminance distribution on the light exit surface when six light guide plates are connected. 10A to 10E show the luminance distribution when the thickness T of the outermost end 18i of the light guide plate 18 is 1.Omm, 1.5mm, 2.Omm, 2.5mm, and 3.Omm, respectively. You. FIG. 11 shows how the bright line changes in accordance with the angle of the inclined surface, that is, the bright line
  • the graphs shown in FIGS. 10A to 10E are collectively shown in order to clearly show the inclination angle dependency of FIG.
  • the bright line is generated at the connecting portion of the light guide plate, and as the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the light guide plate becomes gentler, the brightness at the connecting portion becomes lower and the uneven brightness is reduced. You can see that it is.
  • FIGS. 12A to 12C, 13D, and 13E show graphs of luminance distribution on the light exit surface when nine light guide plates are connected.
  • the graphs shown in FIGS.12A to 12C, FIG.13D, and FIG.13E respectively show the thickness T of the outermost portion 18i of the light guide plate 18 as 1.Omm, 1.5mm, 2.Omm, 2.5mm, 3. This is the result when Omm is set.
  • Fig. 14 shows how the bright line changes according to the angle of the inclined surface, that is, Fig. 12A to Fig. 12C, Fig. 13D, and Fig. The graphs are summarized below.
  • parallel grooves 18f for accommodating the light source 12 are provided in the longitudinal direction on the side opposite to the light exit surface 18a of the thick portion 18b of the light guide plate 18 so that the force shown in FIGS. It is formed to extend.
  • the depth of the parallel groove 18f is determined so that a part of the light source 12 does not protrude from the lower surface of the light guide plate 18, and preferably the dimensions of the light source 12, the mechanical strength of the light guide plate 18, and the change with time. Preferably, it is determined in consideration of the above.
  • the thickness of the thick portion 18b and the thin end portion 18c of the light guide plate 18 can be arbitrarily changed according to the dimensions of the light source 12.
  • the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18 may be formed in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the light guide plate 18, but in order to increase the efficiency of using light from the light source 12 housed in the parallel groove 18f. Is preferably formed in the longitudinal direction.
  • the light guide plate 18 having the structure shown in FIG. 2B, of the light emitted from the light source 12 disposed in the parallel groove 18f, the light enters the light guide plate 18 from the side wall force forming the parallel groove 18f.
  • the reflected light is reflected from the inclined surface 18d of the light guide plate 18 and then exits from the light exit surface 18a.
  • some light leaks from the lower surface force of the light guide plate 18, but the leaked light is reflected by the reflection sheet 18 formed on the inclined surface 18 b side of the light guide plate 18, and again inside the light guide plate 18. And exits from the light exit surface 18a.
  • the uniform light is emitted from the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18. Is emitted.
  • the light guide plate 18 is manufactured by, for example, a method of molding a heated raw resin by extrusion molding or injection molding, or a casting polymerization method of polymerizing monomers, oligomers and the like in a mold and molding. Can be.
  • the material of the light guide plate 18 include acrylic resins such as polycarbonate and PMMA (polymethylmethacrylate), PET (polyethylene terephthalate), PP (polypropylene), PC (polycarbonate), and PMMA (polymer It is possible to use transparent resins such as cinnamate methacrylate, benzyl metathallate, MS resin, other acrylic resins, or COP (Shikiguchi Refin Polymer).
  • Fine particles for dispersing light may be mixed in the transparent resin. This makes it possible to further enhance the efficiency of light emission from the light exit surface 18a.
  • the fine particles may have isotropic properties or may have anisotropy.
  • a color tone correction agent may be provided to correct the color tone of light incident on the liquid crystal display panel.
  • a light guide plate mixed with a color tone correcting agent and a color correction filter for correcting the color tone can be used in combination.
  • the color temperature of the light emitting surface of the liquid crystal display panel is lower than the color temperature of the light source due to the spectral characteristics of the transmission member. Therefore, the color temperature of the light source must be set higher. However, if the color temperature of the light source is set to a high value, the luminance efficiency may decrease.
  • the color temperature of the light source and the color temperature of the liquid crystal display surface can be made equal.
  • high-luminance light emitted from the light source can be emitted from the liquid crystal display panel without lowering the color temperature.
  • power consumption can be reduced, the light source can have a longer life, and the number of light sources and inverters can be reduced to reduce costs.
  • a charge removing material or a conductive material may be applied to the light exit surface side of the light guide plate. This makes it difficult for dust to accumulate inside the backlight due to static electricity.
  • the light emitting surface 18a is opposed to the light emitting surface 18a.
  • the distance from the plane X including the center axis 0 of the rod-shaped light source 12 to the end face 18h of the thin-walled end is L (mm), and is inclined parallel to the light exit surface 18a from the center 0 of the rod-shaped light source 12 AL (mm) is the distance to the intersection P with the surface 18d, t is the light transmittance of the light transmitting resin, and the distance from the intersection P to the light exit surface 18a in the direction perpendicular to the light exit surface 18a.
  • D is set to D (mm), it is preferable to select at least the following expression.
  • kl is a parameter representing the attenuation rate of light inside the light guide plate, and is preferably set to 0 ⁇ kl ⁇ 2 from the viewpoint of the internal transmittance of the material used for the light guide plate.
  • the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18 has a triangular cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the length direction of the parallel groove 18f (hereinafter, simply referred to as the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove! /). It is formed as follows.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove 18f is triangular, but in the present invention, the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove 18f is such that the light exits from the light guide plate 18f through the deepest portion or the center of the parallel groove 18f.
  • Any shape that is symmetrical with respect to the center line perpendicular to the surface and narrows toward the light exit surface 18a may be used.
  • the shape may be a hyperbolic shape or an elliptical shape. be able to.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18 may be a catenary shape.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove is such that the deepest part (connection part of the side wall forming the parallel groove) of the parallel groove is a point. You can also.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the leading end of the parallel groove has two sharp curves, each having one sharp intersection, which are symmetrical with respect to the center line perpendicular to the light exit surface of the light guide plate through the center of the parallel groove. A straight line partial force can also be formed.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove of the light guide plate is any of the above shapes, uniform light can be emitted from the light exit surface of the light guide plate.
  • FIG. 17 shows that the cross-sectional shape of the tip portion of the parallel groove is different from the center line perpendicular to the light exit surface of the light guide plate passing through the center of the parallel groove 18f, which has one sharp intersection point intersecting with each other.
  • An example of the case where the partial force of the two symmetrical curves is also shown.
  • the light guide plate 50 shown in FIG. Two curves 54a and 54b symmetrical with respect to a center line X perpendicular to the light exit surface 52 of the light guide plate 50 through the center of the row groove are the case of arcs. In this case, as shown in FIG.
  • the center position of the arc 54a corresponding to one side wall forming the parallel groove 18f is different from the center position of the arc 54b corresponding to the other side wall. .
  • the portion 56 where the arc-shaped side walls intersect has a pointed shape as shown in FIG.
  • FIG. 18 shows that the cross-sectional shape force of the front end portion of the parallel groove has a sharp point of intersection with one another and passes through the center of the parallel groove and is perpendicular to the center line perpendicular to the light exit surface of the light guide plate.
  • Another example is shown in which the partial force of two symmetric curves is also obtained.
  • two curves 64a and 64b symmetric with respect to a center line X passing through the center of the parallel groove 18f and perpendicular to the light exit surface of the light guide plate are parabolic.
  • the side wall of the parallel groove 18f is formed such that the focus of the parabola 64a forming one side wall of the parallel groove 18f and the focus of the parabola 64b forming the other side wall 22b are different from each other.
  • FIGS. 1 to 18 show examples of the light guide plate in which the side wall of the parallel groove is concave toward the center of the parallel groove in the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove.
  • FIGS. 19 is an example of a light guide plate 70 in which the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove 18f is formed from two curves 72a and 72b that are convex toward the center of the parallel groove 18f
  • FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the parallel groove 18f.
  • This is an example of the light guide plate 80 having a shape formed by combining curves 82a and 82b convex toward the center of the parallel groove 18f and curves 84a and 84b concave.
  • the light guide plates 70 and 80 having parallel grooves having a cross-sectional shape as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 can also emit light with sufficient light emission surface power while suppressing the generation of bright lines.
  • the portion corresponding to the parallel groove has a convex or concave curve directed toward the center of the parallel groove.
  • These curves are not limited to the arcs in the illustrated example, and may be any part of a curve such as an ellipse, a parabola, or a hyperbola that is convex or concave toward the center of the parallel groove.
  • the curve constituting the parallel groove will be a circle or a convex or concave toward the center of the parallel groove. If it is a part of a curve such as an ellipse, a parabola, or a hyperbola, it is preferable that the curve be a curve that can be approximated by a 10th order function.
  • the density of the halftone dots is high at a certain center line X, and as the halftone dot moves toward both sides (perpendicular to the center line) from the center line X, as shown in FIG.
  • a halftone dot pattern 92 having a low halftone dot density may be formed on the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18, for example, by printing.
  • a halftone dot pattern 92 By forming such a halftone dot pattern 92 on the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 so that the center line X of the halftone dot pattern coincides with the position corresponding to the center line of the parallel groove of the light guide plate 18, The generation and unevenness of bright lines on the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 can be suppressed.
  • a thin sheet having the halftone dot pattern formed thereon may be laminated on the light exit surface.
  • the shape of the halftone dot can be an arbitrary shape such as a rectangle, a circle, and an ellipse, and the density of the halftone dot can be appropriately selected according to the intensity and spread of the bright line.
  • a portion corresponding to the halftone dot pattern may be roughened as a sand rubbing surface.
  • a sand rubbing surface may be formed on the deepest portion or the side wall of the parallel groove of the light guide plate.
  • the parallel groove 18f has a triangular or hyperbolic cross-sectional shape as shown in FIGS. 2A to 2C and FIG. 15, and a conventional light guide plate has a parabolic cross-sectional shape. , And a semicircular shape.
  • FIG. 22 shows the relative illuminance distributions on the light exit side surfaces of the light guide plates.
  • the vertical axis indicates the relative illuminance
  • the horizontal axis indicates the distance from the center position of the light guide plate (the center of the parallel groove).
  • the relative illuminance was measured as follows.
  • a light source is incorporated in the light guide plate of the present invention, and light enters the light guide plate to emit light from the light exit surface. Then, fix the illuminometer so that it is perpendicular to the emission surface of the light guide plate. Then, the illuminance is measured at the position of the light exit surface by the illuminometer to obtain information of the illuminance regarding the specific position of the light exit surface of the light guide plate.
  • the relationship between the position on the light emitting surface and the illuminance is determined, and the average value of the entire surface is calculated.
  • the ratio of the illuminance at each position divided by the average value of the illuminance, respectively, is the relative illuminance at that position.
  • a luminance meter may be used instead of the illuminometer, whereby the relative luminance distribution on the light emission side surface of the light guide plate can be obtained.
  • the relative illuminance at the center is low.
  • the cross-sectional shape of such a parallel groove is triangular, as shown below, the force for flattening the apex with a predetermined width and the illuminance on the light exit surface are obtained by forming the curved surface with a relatively small radius of curvature. Can be made uniform.
  • FIG. 23 shows that, when the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove of the light guide plate is triangular, the deepest portion of the parallel groove (the apex of the triangular parallel groove) is flattened, and the length of the flat portion is varied. It shows the illuminance distribution of the emitted light when the light exit surface force of the light guide plate is changed.
  • the vertical axis indicates the relative illuminance
  • the horizontal axis indicates the distance from the center of the parallel groove formed in the light guide plate.
  • the diameter of the cold cathode tube was 3 mm
  • the length of the flat part was 1.5 mm, 1.0 mm, 0.5 mm, and 0.25 mm.
  • Figures 24A to 24D In the case where the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove is triangular, the schematic cross-sectional views of the light guide plate with the flat part at the deepest part of the parallel groove being 1.5 mm, 1. Omm, 0.5 mm, 0.25 mm are shown, respectively.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove is triangular
  • the schematic cross-sectional views of the light guide plate with the flat part at the deepest part of the parallel groove being 1.5 mm, 1. Omm, 0.5 mm, 0.25 mm are shown, respectively.
  • the relative illuminance at a portion corresponding to the parallel groove of the light guide plate changes according to the length of the flat portion.
  • the illuminance can be increased by lengthening the flat end portion at the deepest portion of the parallel groove.
  • the diameter is preferably 20% or less of the diameter of the tube, more preferably 10% or less.
  • Fig. 25 shows that in the light guide plate in which the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove of the light guide plate is triangular, the shape of the deepest portion of the parallel groove is a curved surface having a radius of curvature R, and the radius of curvature of the curved surface is varied.
  • the light exit surface power of the light guide plate when the light guide plate was transformed was shown as the illuminance distribution of the emitted light.
  • the radius of the cold-cathode tube was 3 mm, and the radii of curvature at the apexes were measured at 0.25 mm, 0.5 mm, 1.0 mm, and 1.5 mm.
  • Figures 26A to 26D show schematic cross-sectional views of light guide plates with the radii of curvature at the vertices of 0.25mm, 0.5mm, 1.Omm, and 1.5mm, respectively, when the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove is triangular.
  • the relative illuminance at the portion corresponding to the parallel groove of the light guide plate changes according to the radius of curvature of the vertex portion of the parallel groove. It can be seen that the relative illuminance on the light exit surface is substantially uniform.
  • the shape of the tip of the parallel groove of the light guide plate greatly depends on the illuminance of the light exit surface force. That is, the illuminance on the light exit surface of the light guide plate can be optimally adjusted and made uniform only by designing the shape of the parallel grooves of the light guide plate to have the shape shown in the present invention. .
  • illuminance and luminance can be handled in substantially the same manner. Therefore, from the relative illuminance graphs of FIGS. 23 and 25, it is inferred that in the present invention, there is a similar tendency in luminance. Therefore, it is considered that by designing the shape of the parallel groove of the light guide plate so as to have the shape shown in the present invention, the luminance on the light exit surface of the light guide plate can also be made uniform.
  • the cross-sectional shape of the top (deepest) of the tip of the parallel groove is such that one point of intersection that is sharply symmetrical with respect to the center line of the parallel groove is a chamfered flat shape or a rounded circular shape. Needless to say, the shape may be elliptical, parabolic, or hyperbolic.
  • the peak (the deepest part) of the tip of the parallel groove may be a sand rubbing surface to reduce the illuminance or luminance peak value.
  • the ratio of the peak value (peak value of illuminance) of the bright line formed in the portion (first portion) corresponding to the parallel groove 18f on the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 It is preferable to taper the tip shape, that is, to control the degree of tapering of the tip shape of the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18 according to the value of this ratio.
  • the ratio is preferably 3 or less, more preferably 2 or less.
  • This ratio depends on the thickness of the knock light unit 2 (the distance between the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 and the diffusion sheet 14) and the diffusion sheet used in the knock light unit 2. It is preferable to set according to the diffusion efficiency and the number of sheets of 14, and the diffusion efficiency and the number of sheets used of the prism sheets 16, 17 and 19. That is, the thickness of the knock light unit 2 (the distance between the light emitting surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 and the diffusion sheet 14) can be increased (or increased) to some extent, or the diffusion sheet used in the knock light unit 2 can be increased.
  • the diffusion efficiency of 14 can be increased and the number of used sheets can be increased, or the diffusion efficiency of prism sheets 16, 17 and 19 can be increased, the light emitted from the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 can be used.
  • the ratio of the peak values of the illuminance of the first portion of 18a can be set to a somewhat large value. However, if this is not the case, it is necessary to set the value of this ratio small enough to achieve low cost.
  • the peak value of the illuminance of the first portion of the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 is equal to the average value of the illuminance of the second portion of the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18. It is preferable to taper the tip shape of the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18 so as to be three times or less, more preferably two times or less.
  • the reason why the peak value of the illuminance of the first portion of the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 is three times or less the average value of the illuminance of the second portion of the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 is as follows.
  • the illuminance distribution of the illumination light emitted from the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 is more uniform than before. As a result, the illumination light emitted from the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 does not need to be sufficiently diffused (mixing, etc.), and the diffusion efficiency is extremely high.
  • the use of the diffusion sheet 14 is possible, the number of sheets used can be reduced, and the use of the expensive prism sheets 16, 17, and 19 itself can be stopped. This is because the prism sheets 16, 17 and 19 can be used and the number of sheets used can be reduced.
  • the tapered tip portion of the parallel groove 18 f has a central force of the rod-shaped light source 12.
  • Direction force on the emission surface 18a Angular force with respect to the perpendicular (X)
  • Both sides are preferably within 90 degrees, more preferably within 60 degrees. That is, in the present invention, in order to reduce the peak value of the illuminance of the first portion corresponding to the parallel groove 18f of the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18, the portion where the parallel groove 18f is tapered is the parallel groove 18f. The whole may be used, but if the peak value can be reduced, a predetermined tip may be used.
  • the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18 is shaped as described above, and the inclination angle ⁇ 1 of the inclined surface and the inclination angle ⁇ 2 at the extreme end of the inclined surface are as described above.
  • ⁇ 2 and ⁇ 1 when a plurality of light guide plates are connected, it is possible to suppress the generation of bright lines from each of the light guide plates and also to suppress the generation of bright lines at the connected portions.
  • a backlight unit having such a large-sized light irradiation surface can be applied to a liquid crystal display device having a large-sized display screen, and is particularly suitable for a wall-mounted liquid crystal display device such as a wall-mounted television. is there.
  • the light guide plate of the present invention As described above, the light guide plate of the present invention, the backlight unit including the same, and the liquid crystal display device have been described in detail.
  • the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and is not departed from the gist of the present invention.
  • various improvements and changes may be made
  • a light guide plate having a shape as shown in FIG. Although the configuration in which a plurality of the light guide plates are connected to form a large light guide plate has been described, in order to enhance the uniformity of emitted light, a shape in which two or more light guide plates of the present invention are connected is described. It is preferable to form the structure integrally and use the structure as one light guide plate. In particular, from the viewpoint of improving the manufacturing efficiency, it is preferable to integrally form as many light guide plates as necessary for illuminating the liquid crystal panel according to the screen size of the liquid crystal display panel to be used.
  • the light quantity distribution of the luminous flux emitted from the light exit surface is uniform, and a thin knob having a large-sized light irradiation surface with suppressed generation of bright lines is provided.
  • a light unit can be realized. Further, such an integrated light guide plate can be easily manufactured by using, for example, an extrusion molding method.
  • the light exit surfaces of the plurality of connected light guide plates are flat, that is, the light exit surfaces of the respective light guide plates are necessarily flat.
  • the light guide plate may be configured such that the entire light exit surface of the light guide plate when a plurality of light guide plates are connected has the same curved surface. It may be configured to have a curved surface.
  • each light guide plate may be configured such that undulations with a constant period are formed on the entire light exit surface of the light guide plate when a plurality of light guide plates are connected.
  • a sand rubbing surface, a large number of dimples or a large number of minute projections, or a large number of scatterers may be formed by printing on the entire surface or a part of the light exit surface. Such a sand rubbing surface, dimples, protrusions, and scatterers tend to suppress the generation of bright lines on the light exit surface of the light guide plate.
  • one halftone sheet 350 on which halftone dots for suppressing the occurrence of light are formed is arranged so as to cover the light exit surfaces of the plurality of connected light guide plates 18.
  • the sheet 350 can have various sizes according to the number of the light guide plates 18 to be connected, and the halftone dots of the halftone sheet 18 are arranged at the positions where the bright lines on the light exit surface of the light guide plate 18 are generated. .
  • the material of the halftone sheet 350 the same material as that of the light guide plate 18 or a material having substantially the same thermal expansion coefficient and high transmittance and diffusion effect is used from the viewpoint of suppressing the influence of thermal change. Is preferred.
  • the position of the halftone dot of the halftone dot sheet will be different from the position of the bright line on the light exit surface of the light guide plate due to changes in temperature and humidity due to the manufacturing environment and use environment. Deviation is suppressed, and a change in the illuminance distribution of light emitted from the light exit surface of the light guide plate unit can be suppressed.
  • the light guide plate may have a structure such that it is divided along the center line of the parallel groove for arranging the light source in light guide plate 18 shown in FIG. 2B.
  • the light guide plates are connected to each other at a portion corresponding to the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18 having the structure shown in FIG. 2B. It is preferable to arrange the halftone sheets so as to coincide with the portion having the highest density of halftone dots in the dot sheet.
  • some light guide plates are configured with a structure divided along the center line of the parallel groove, and the other light guide plates are as shown in Fig. 2B.
  • a halftone dot pattern of a halftone dot sheet so as to increase the density of halftone dots at a position corresponding to the center line of the parallel groove of the light guide plate other than the connection portion, .
  • a dot pattern when a plurality of light guide plates are connected to manufacture a large-sized knock light unit, generation and unevenness of a bright line at a connection portion of the plurality of light guide plates are suppressed. be able to.
  • Such a dot sheet can be bonded to the light guide plate by laminating an adhesive layer on the back surface.
  • the position of the halftone dot pattern formed on the halftone sheet is determined by the center of the parallel groove of the light guide plate.
  • an area not used as a light emitting area on the light emitting surface of the light guide plate and a position of the dot sheet corresponding to the position are used for positioning. It is preferable to form holes. By passing a fixing tool such as a pin through these positioning holes, it is possible to accurately and reliably position the bright line generating position of the light guide plate and the position of the halftone dot of the halftone dot sheet.
  • the position of the hole for positioning is The area is not particularly limited as long as it is not used.However, in order to reduce the shift between the halftone dot pattern and the position corresponding to the center line of the parallel groove of the light guide plate due to the influence of temperature and humidity changes, the parallel groove of the light guide plate is used. It is preferable to form a hole at the substantially end of the light exit surface in the direction perpendicular to the center line of the parallel groove of the light guide plate on the end side in the length direction.
  • the position of the halftone dot sheet is regulated with respect to the light guide plate in the vicinity of the center of the combined light guide plate, and that the outer peripheral portion is fitted with a gap only by its thickness.
  • the reflection plate 24 may be arranged on the side surface of the light guide plate 18 as shown in FIG. 27A in consideration of the area of the side surface and the like. Further, as described above, when a plurality of light guide plates 18 are arranged, as shown in FIG. 27B, the reflection plate 24 may be arranged on the side surface of the outermost light guide plate 18. By arranging such a reflection plate 24 on the side surface, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the side surface of the light guide plate 24, and it is possible to further enhance the light use efficiency.
  • the reflecting plate 24 can be formed using the same material as the above-mentioned reflecting sheet or reflector.
  • a reflective plate 362 made of the same material as the above-described reflective sheet 22 and reflector may be disposed on a side surface of the light guide plate 18 in the longitudinal direction of the light source 12.
  • the emission efficiency can be further improved, and the uneven brightness at the end of the light guide plate 18 in the longitudinal direction of the light source 12 can be reduced.
  • the brightness distribution of the light source is not flat in the longitudinal direction of the light source
  • the light guide plate 18 extends in the longitudinal direction of the light source 12.
  • the shape may be such that the angle of the tip of the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18 increases from the end (see FIGS. 37B and 37D) toward the center (see FIG. 37C).
  • the luminance distribution of the light source is not flat, or the brightness of light emitted from the light exit surface of the light guide plate.
  • the arrangement interval of the plurality of light sources may be changed, that is, the width of each light guide plate may be adjusted according to the arrangement position. For example, parallel to the light exit surface If the brightness increases from the end of the light guide plate toward the center in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the light source, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 38, the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 In a direction parallel to and perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the light source 12, the distance between the light sources 12 may be narrower as the center of the light guide plate 18 is further away.
  • the light exit surface of the light guide plate is formed into a curved surface shape having a curved cross-sectional shape in a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the light source, and is formed in a direction parallel to the light exit surface and perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the light source.
  • the luminance distribution of the light source or the light exit surface force of the light guide plate may also make the luminance distribution of the emitted light flat. For example, if the brightness increases from the end of the light guide plate toward the center in a direction parallel to the light exit surface and perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the light source, the light guide plate 18 is moved to the light source as shown in FIG.
  • a cross-sectional shape in a plane orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the light source 12 is convex to the side of the light source 12 as an R-shaped curved surface in a direction parallel to the light exit surface of the light guide plate 18 and orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the light source. Then, the shape may be such that the distance between the light source disposed on each light guide plate and the liquid crystal display panel 4 increases from the end of the light guide plate toward the center.
  • the end 402 of the light guide plate 18 in the longitudinal direction of the light source 12 is A shape having a predetermined angle of inclination from a direction perpendicular to the light exit surface may be used. Furthermore, when the luminance distribution near the end of the light guide plate in a direction parallel to the light exit surface and perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the light source is different from that of the other portions, as shown in FIG. 40B and FIG.
  • the end of the light guide plate in a direction parallel to the surface and perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the light source may have a shape having a predetermined angle of inclination from a direction perpendicular to the light exit surface of the light guide plate. In this way, by adjusting the shape of the light guide plate according to the light source, uniform light can be emitted from the light exit surface.
  • the light exit surface of the light guide plate 18 is formed into a gently curved surface having a curved cross-sectional shape in the longitudinal direction of the light source 12.
  • a minute height rib 412 extending in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the light source 12 may be provided on the light exit surface of the light guide plate 19 as shown in FIG. 41B. This can prevent the light guide plate from bending in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the light source.
  • the rib 412 is provided between the light guide plate 18 and a sheet-like member constituting a backlight unit such as a diffusion sheet.
  • the liquid crystal display panel also functions as a spacer for forming a predetermined gap, thereby making the illuminance of the light illuminating the liquid crystal display panel more uniform.
  • a reflection sheet is attached to the inclined surface of the light guide plate 18, and the reflection sheet is extended to the parallel groove of the light guide plate to regulate the position of the light source or to temporarily fix the light source. Or just a little.
  • the position of the light source with respect to the light guide plate becomes constant, and luminance unevenness can be reduced. Further, by temporarily fixing the light source, the assemblability of the knock light unit can be improved.
  • an elastic member that embraces the cold cathode tube for example, a transparent O-ring is attached to the end of the cold cathode tube. It may be provided. By providing such an elastic member, the elastic member acts as a cushioning material. Therefore, when the cold cathode tube is arranged in the parallel groove of the light guide plate, the cold cathode tube collides with the parallel groove and the cold cathode tube is turned on. Damage can be prevented. Further, by fixing the elastic member to the cold cathode tube, handling in the assembly and manufacturing process is improved. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 42, by providing electrode covers at both ends of the cold cathode tube, it is possible to easily attach and detach the cold cathode tube from the housing that houses the knock light unit.
  • the cold cathode tube may be prevented from being partially cooled.
  • the light guide plate, the planar lighting device and the liquid crystal display device using the same according to the present invention have been described in detail.
  • the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and the present invention is not limited thereto. Of course, various improvements and changes may be made, of course.
  • the light guide plate of the present invention can accommodate the light source in the parallel groove formed therein, so that it can be made thinner and lighter than before, and
  • the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove is By narrowing the tip toward the surface, it is possible to reduce the peak of illuminance or brightness, and to increase the light output surface power. It is possible to emit uniform, less uneven and higher-luminance illumination light, and furthermore, even if a plurality of light guide plates are connected, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of bright lines at the connection portions.
  • the size of the light exit surface of the light guide plate can be made larger.
  • the spread illuminating device of the present invention is thin and lightweight, can be manufactured at lower cost, can emit more uniform, less uneven, and higher-luminance illumination light.
  • the lighting surface can be made large, so that it can be applied to a liquid crystal display device such as a wall-mounted television.
  • liquid crystal display device of the present invention is thin and lightweight, can be manufactured at lower cost, can provide a more uniform, less uneven, and higher-luminance display.
  • the screen can be large and can be a wall-mounted type such as a wall-mounted television.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Planar Illumination Modules (AREA)

Abstract

In a transparent waveguide (18), an orthogonal direction cross section shape of a leading edge part of a parallel groove (18f), which is formed on a thick part (18b) of the optical waveguide and stores a bar-shaped light source, is tapered symmetrically to the center line, toward a rectangular light projecting plane (18a). A relationship between an inclination angle (Φ1) of an inclined rear plane part (18d) to a light projecting plane (18a) and a distance (W) between the both outermost edges satisfies an inequality of Φ1[rad]×W[mm] ≤200[mm]. Illuminance or brightness at a part equivalent to the parallel groove (18f) on the light projecting plane (18a) can be adjusted, and generation of emission lines can be suppressed. When the optical waveguide (18) having a large size light projecting plane is constituted by connecting a plurality of the optical waveguides (18), generation of emission lines at the connecting parts can be suppressed. As a result, the large size optical waveguide (18) which can project uniform illuminating light with less irregularity and higher brightness from the light projecting plane, a planar illuminating device (2) which uses the optical waveguide and has a large size illuminating surface, and a liquid crystal display device (10) having a large size display screen such as a wall-hung TV can be provided.

Description

明 細 書  Specification
導光板、これを用いる面状照明装置および液晶表示装置  Light guide plate, planar lighting device and liquid crystal display device using the same
技術分野  Technical field
[0001] 本発明は、棒状光源から入射した光を面方向に拡散して光射出面からより均一な 照明光を出射する透明な導光板、これを用いる面状照明装置および液晶表示装置 に関する。  The present invention relates to a transparent light guide plate that diffuses light incident from a rod-shaped light source in a plane direction and emits more uniform illumination light from a light exit surface, a planar lighting device using the same, and a liquid crystal display device.
背景技術  Background art
[0002] 液晶表示装置には、液晶パネル (LCD)の裏面側力 光を照射し、液晶パネルを 照明するバックライトユニットが用いられている。バックライトユニットは、照明用の光源 、この光源力 出射した光を拡散して液晶パネルを照射する導光板、導光板から放 射される光を均一化するプリズムシートや拡散シートなどの部品を用いて構成される  [0002] A backlight unit that illuminates a liquid crystal panel (LCD) with light from the rear side thereof to illuminate the liquid crystal panel is used in the liquid crystal display device. The backlight unit uses a light source for illumination, a light guide plate for diffusing the emitted light and illuminating the liquid crystal panel, and a prism sheet and a diffusion sheet for uniformizing the light emitted from the light guide plate. Composed
[0003] 現在、大型の液晶テレビのバックライトユニットは、実開平 5—4133号公報に開示 されているような、照明用の光源の直上に導光板を配置した、いわゆる直下型と呼ば れる方式が主流である。本方式は、光源である冷陰極管を液晶パネルの背面に複数 本配置し、内部を白色の反射面として均一な光量分布と必要な輝度を確保して 、る 。し力しながら、本方式では、原理的に光量分布を均一にするために液晶パネルに 垂直方向の厚みが 30mm程度必要である。 At present, a backlight unit of a large liquid crystal television is a so-called direct type in which a light guide plate is disposed immediately above a light source for illumination, as disclosed in Japanese Utility Model Laid-Open No. 5-4133. Is the mainstream. In this method, a plurality of cold-cathode tubes, which are light sources, are arranged on the back of a liquid crystal panel, and the inside is used as a white reflective surface to ensure a uniform light amount distribution and required luminance. However, this method requires a thickness of about 30 mm in the vertical direction of the liquid crystal panel in order to make the light quantity distribution uniform in principle.
[0004] 近年、液晶表示装置の薄型化、低消費電力化、大型化が要望されており、上述し た直下型のバックライトユニットでは、 10mm以下の厚みは光量ムラの観点力も実現 不可能であり、そのため、液晶表示装置の薄型化、低消費電力化、大型化を実現す るために種々の形状の導光板が提案されて!、る(特開平 9 - 304623号公報、同 8 — 62426号公報、同 10— 133027号公報、同 5— 249320号公報および特開 200 1—42327号公報参照)。  [0004] In recent years, there has been a demand for thinner, lower power consumption, and larger liquid crystal display devices. With the above-described direct-type backlight unit, a thickness of 10 mm or less cannot realize the viewpoint of unevenness in light intensity. Therefore, light guide plates of various shapes have been proposed in order to realize a thin liquid crystal display device, low power consumption, and large size! (Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 9-304623, 8-62426). JP-A-10-133027, JP-A-5-249320 and JP-A-2001-42327).
[0005] 図 43は、それぞれ、特開平 9— 304623号公報に開示された導光板 100を有する 面光源装置の概略断面図である。  FIG. 43 is a schematic sectional view of a surface light source device having a light guide plate 100 disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-304623.
同図に示す面光源装置 (バックライトユニット)は、導光板 100に蛍光ランプ 102を 埋め込んだ後、導光板 100の背面に反射シート 104を配置し、導光板 100の出射面 に透過光量補正シート 106、光拡散板 108、プリズムシート 110を積層することで形 成される。 The surface light source device (backlight unit) shown in FIG. After embedding, it is formed by arranging a reflection sheet 104 on the back surface of the light guide plate 100 and stacking a transmission light amount correction sheet 106, a light diffusion plate 108, and a prism sheet 110 on the emission surface of the light guide plate 100.
導光板 100は、略長方形形状を有し、照明光を拡散する微粒子が分散混入された 榭脂を用いて形成されている。また、導光板 100の上面は平坦になっており、出射面 に割り当てられる。さらに、導光板 100の背面(出射面と反対側の面)には蛍光ランプ 102を埋め込む断面 U字状の溝 100aが形成され、導光板 100の出射面には、蛍光 ランプ 102の真上を避けて、照明光の出射を促す光量補正面 100bが形成されてい る。  The light guide plate 100 has a substantially rectangular shape, and is formed using a resin into which fine particles that diffuse illumination light are dispersed and mixed. In addition, the upper surface of the light guide plate 100 is flat, and is allocated to the emission surface. Further, a U-shaped cross section groove 100a for embedding the fluorescent lamp 102 is formed on the back surface (the surface opposite to the emission surface) of the light guide plate 100, and the emission surface of the light guide plate 100 is formed just above the fluorescent lamp 102. By avoiding this, a light quantity correction surface 100b that promotes emission of illumination light is formed.
このように、特開平 9— 304623号公報には、微粒子を混入して導光板 100を形成 すると共に、蛍光ランプ 102の真上を除いた出射面の一部または全部に形成した光 量補正面 100bにより照明光の出射を促すことにより、全体の厚さを薄型化し、かつ 出射光の不自然な輝度ムラを低減できることが記載されて 、る。  As described above, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-304623 discloses that a light guide plate 100 is formed by mixing fine particles, and a light amount correction surface formed on a part or all of an emission surface except a portion right above a fluorescent lamp 102. It is described that by promoting the emission of the illumination light by 100b, the overall thickness can be reduced and unnatural luminance unevenness of the emitted light can be reduced.
[0006] また、特開平 8— 62426号公報には、ノ ックライトの照射量を減らすことなぐ液晶 表示装置の小型軽量化や薄型化およびコスト'消費電力の低減化を実現することが できる液晶表示装置のバックライトを得るために、長方形の照射面と、短辺の中央部 に長辺と平行にくり抜かれた、光源を嵌挿するための矩形断面の溝と、この溝を挟ん で長辺の両側面方向に向かって板厚が次第に薄くなるように形成された背面とを有 する導光板が開示されている。  [0006] Further, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 8-62426 discloses a liquid crystal display that can realize a small and lightweight liquid crystal display device without reducing the irradiation amount of a knock light, a thinner liquid crystal display device, and a reduction in cost and power consumption. In order to obtain the backlight of the device, a rectangular irradiation surface, a rectangular section with a rectangular section cut out in the center of the short side in parallel with the long side and for inserting a light source, and the long side sandwiching this groove There is disclosed a light guide plate having a back surface formed such that the plate thickness gradually decreases toward both side surfaces of the light guide plate.
[0007] また、特開平 10— 133027号公報には、液晶表示装置の額縁を狭くし、厚みを薄 くすることができ、光利用効率がよく明るいバックライトユニットを得るために、光源を 配置するための凹部の幅方向に平行な断面の形状が、深さ方向を主軸とする放物 線形状である導光体 (導光板)が開示されて!、る。  [0007] Further, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. Hei 10-133027 discloses that a light source is arranged in order to obtain a bright backlight unit that can make the frame of a liquid crystal display device narrower and thinner, and has high light use efficiency. A light guide (light guide plate) having a parabolic shape in which the cross section parallel to the width direction of the concave portion is parallel to the depth direction is disclosed.
[0008] さらに、特開平 5— 249320号公報には、表示パネルの面内の明るさを均一に保ち 、高輝度な照明をするために、ハの字状の高反射層上に、順次屈折率が高くなるよう に複数の板状光導波層を積層し、その各光出射端面から出射する光で光拡散層を 明るくする導光板が開示されている。ここで、光源を配置するための凹部は、三角形 形状である。 上記各公報に開示された導光板は、液晶表示装置の薄型化、小型軽量化、低消 費電力化、低コストィ匕などのいくつかを図るためのものである力 いずれもその中央 部に 1つまたは複数の溝が設けられ、その溝に棒状光源を収納する構成とされ、好ま しくは、溝部力も端面に向力つて板厚が次第に薄くなるように形成されおり、薄型化を 達成している。 [0008] Further, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 5-249320 discloses that in order to keep the in-plane brightness of the display panel uniform and to provide high-luminance illumination, the light is sequentially refracted on a C-shaped high reflection layer. There is disclosed a light guide plate in which a plurality of plate-shaped optical waveguide layers are stacked so as to increase the efficiency, and the light diffusion layer is brightened by light emitted from each light emitting end face. Here, the concave portion for arranging the light source has a triangular shape. The light guide plates disclosed in each of the above publications are used to reduce the thickness, size, and weight of the liquid crystal display device, reduce power consumption, and reduce costs. One or a plurality of grooves are provided, and the rod-shaped light source is housed in the grooves. Preferably, the groove force is formed so that the plate thickness is gradually reduced toward the end face, and the thickness is reduced. I have.
[0009] また、特開 2001—42327号公報には、液晶バックライトを壁掛けテレビの大型液 晶表示面用に改良する為に、複数の導光板を並列に配置し、導光板間に所定数の 線状光源を配置して高輝度にして高均一の大型の背面照明を実現している。  [0009] Also, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-42327 discloses that in order to improve a liquid crystal backlight for a large liquid crystal display surface of a wall-mounted television, a plurality of light guide plates are arranged in parallel, and a predetermined number of light guide plates are provided between the light guide plates. By arranging the linear light source, high brightness and high uniformity, large-scale backlighting is realized.
特許文献 1 :実開平 5— 4133号公報  Patent Document 1: Japanese Utility Model Application No. 5-4133
特許文献 2:特開平 9 - 304623号公報  Patent Document 2: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-304623
特許文献 3:特開平 8— 62426号公報  Patent Document 3: JP-A-8-62426
特許文献 4:特開平 10— 133027号公報  Patent Document 4: JP-A-10-133027
特許文献 5:特開平 5 - 249320号公報  Patent Document 5: JP-A-5-249320
特許文献 6:特開 2001—42327号公報  Patent Document 6: JP 2001-42327 A
発明の開示  Disclosure of the invention
発明が解決しょうとする課題  Problems to be solved by the invention
[0010] し力しながら、特開平 9— 304623号公報に開示の導光板 100では、光源 (蛍光ラ ンプ) 102の真上を避けてその出射面表面に粗面やマイクロプリズム面などの光量補 正面 100bを形成して、出射面に対して臨界角以上の角度で入射する照明光の出射 を促しているが、図 44に示されるように、点線で示される光量補正面を持たない導光 板からの照明光の輝度 N 1に対する、点線で示される実線で示される光量補正面 10 Obを持つ導光板 100からの照明光の輝度 N2の向上効果は少しであるので、光量補 正面 100bによる輝度の向上効果は大きくはなぐ光源光の利用効率が低ぐ光源光 の拡散が不十分なため、均一かつ高輝度な光を出射面力 出射することができない という問題点がある。 In the light guide plate 100 disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. Hei 9-304623, the light output surface of the light guide plate 100 is not directly above the light source (fluorescent lamp) 102 but has a rough surface or a micro prism surface. A supplementary front face 100b is formed to promote the emission of illumination light that enters the emission surface at an angle greater than the critical angle. However, as shown in FIG. Since the luminance N2 of the illumination light from the light guide plate 100 having the light amount correction surface 10 Ob indicated by the solid line shown by the dotted line with respect to the luminance N1 of the illumination light from the light plate is slight, the light amount compensation front 100b The effect of improving the luminance by the light source is large. The efficiency of the use of the light source light is low. The light source light is insufficiently diffused, so that there is a problem that uniform and high-luminance light cannot be emitted.
[0011] また、特開平 9— 304623号公報に開示の導光板 100では、断面形状が円形であ る溝 100aに光源(蛍光ランプ) 102を埋め込んでおり、図 44に示すように、光源 102 による輝度ピークはそのまま残存するので、面光源装置として用いるためには、導光 板の出射側に配置される透過光量補正シート 106、光拡散板 108およびプリズムシ ート 110などを用いて、出射面での不自然な輝度むらを除く必要があるし、そのため 面光源装置のコストがアップするという問題がある。 [0011] Further, in the light guide plate 100 disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 9-304623, a light source (fluorescent lamp) 102 is embedded in a groove 100a having a circular cross section, and as shown in FIG. Luminance peaks remain as they are. It is necessary to remove the unnatural luminance unevenness on the emission surface by using the transmitted light amount correction sheet 106, the light diffusion plate 108, and the prism sheet 110 arranged on the emission side of the plate. There is a problem that is up.
[0012] また、特開平 8— 62426号公報に開示の液晶表示装置のバックライトでは、導光板 の背面を傾斜させることにより生じた隙間に電子回路基板上の部品を配置することに より、安価で消費電力が低ぐ液晶表示装置の小型軽量化や薄型化を達成すること ができるが、導光板の出射面から出射される照明光のむらについては全く考慮され ていない。 [0012] Further, in the backlight of the liquid crystal display device disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. H8-62426, components on the electronic circuit board are arranged in gaps created by tilting the back surface of the light guide plate, thereby reducing costs. Thus, the size and weight of the liquid crystal display device can be reduced and the thickness of the liquid crystal display device can be reduced. However, the unevenness of the illumination light emitted from the emission surface of the light guide plate is not considered at all.
[0013] また、特開平 10— 133027号公報に開示の液晶表示装置のバックライトユニットで は、導光体 (導光板)に設けられる溝上の凹部の断面形状を放物線とすることにより、 導光体での光の拡散がほぼ均一になる導光体への光の入射が行われ、光の利用効 率を高めることができるとしている力 導光体の出射面から出射される光のむらにつ V、ては全く考慮されて 、な!/、。  [0013] Further, in the backlight unit of the liquid crystal display device disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 10-133027, the cross-sectional shape of the concave portion on the groove provided in the light guide (light guide plate) is made parabolic, so that the light guide Light is incident on the light guide where the diffusion of light in the body is almost uniform, and the efficiency of light utilization is said to be improved. V, it is considered at all! /.
[0014] また、特開平 5— 249320号公報に開示の導光板では、複数の板状光導波板を積 層する複雑な構造であるため、従来に比し輝度の減衰を少なくし均一な輝度を得る ことが可能となり照明効果に優れるものとなるとしている力 製造コストが高くなるとい う問題点がある。  Further, the light guide plate disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 5-249320 has a complicated structure in which a plurality of plate-shaped optical waveguide plates are stacked, so that the brightness attenuation is reduced and uniform brightness is reduced as compared with the related art. It has the problem that the manufacturing cost is high.
[0015] また、特開 2001— 42327号公報に開示の導光板では、線状光源の直上部分で 輝度が上昇する為に、線状光源の光源光の透過を抑制する透過抑制パターンを設 けなければならないし、線状光源からの光は導光板の内部で、一方の端部から他方 の端部に向かって面内方向に透過するために次第に光量が減衰してしま 、、高輝度 化には不十分であった。  In the light guide plate disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2001-42327, a transmission suppression pattern for suppressing transmission of light from the linear light source is provided in order to increase the luminance immediately above the linear light source. The light from the linear light source must be transmitted inside the light guide plate from one end to the other end in the in-plane direction. Was not enough.
[0016] 本発明の第 1の課題は、上記従来技術の問題点を解消し、薄型で軽量であり、複 数並列して構成しても光射出面力 より均一でむらの少ない、かつより高輝度な照明 光を高効率で出射することのできる導光板を提供することにある。  [0016] A first object of the present invention is to solve the above-mentioned problems of the prior art, to be thin and light, and to have a uniform and less uneven light output surface force even when a plurality of light emitting devices are configured in parallel. An object of the present invention is to provide a light guide plate capable of emitting high-luminance illumination light with high efficiency.
また、本発明の他の課題は、上記第 1の課題に加え、より大サイズの光射出面とす ることができる導光板を提供することにある。  Further, another object of the present invention is to provide a light guide plate capable of providing a light emitting surface of a larger size, in addition to the first object.
[0017] また、本発明の第 2の課題は、上記従来技術の問題点を解消し、直下型よりも薄型 で軽量であり、より低コストで製造することができ、より均一でむらの少ない、かつより 高輝度な照明光を出射することのでき、また、大サイズの照明表面とすることができ、 または、壁掛けテレビなどの液晶表示装置に適用することができる面状照明装置を 提供することにある。 [0017] A second object of the present invention is to solve the above-mentioned problems of the prior art, and to make it thinner than a direct type. And can be manufactured at lower cost, can emit more uniform, less uneven, and higher-intensity illumination light, and can have a large-sized illumination surface, or Another object of the present invention is to provide a planar lighting device that can be applied to a liquid crystal display device such as a wall-mounted television.
[0018] また、本発明の第 3の課題は、上記従来技術の問題点を解消し、薄型で軽量であり 、より低コストで製造することができ、より均一でむらの少ない、かつより高輝度な表示 を行うことができ、また、大サイズの表示画面とすることができ、あるいは、壁掛けテレ ビなどの壁掛け型とすることができる液晶表示装置を提供することにある。  [0018] A third object of the present invention is to solve the above-mentioned problems of the prior art, to be thin and lightweight, to be able to be manufactured at lower cost, to be more uniform, to have less unevenness, and to be more efficient. It is an object of the present invention to provide a liquid crystal display device which can perform bright display, can have a large-sized display screen, or can be of a wall-mounted type such as a wall-mounted television.
課題を解決するための手段  Means for solving the problem
[0019] 上記第 1の課題を解決するために、本発明の第 1の態様の第 1の形態は、透明な導 光板であって、矩形状光射出面と、前記矩形状光射出面の一辺に平行で矩形状略 中央部に位置する一対の厚肉部と、前記一辺に直交する方向で前記厚肉部よりも外 側に位置し、前記厚肉部に平行に形成される一対の薄肉端部と、棒状光源が収納さ れ、前記一対の厚肉部の間に位置し、前記矩形状光射出面が形成されている側と 反対側に前記一辺と平行に形成される平行溝と、前記棒状光源の軸を含み前記矩 形状光射出面に対して垂直な面に対して対称であり、前記厚肉部から前記一辺に直 交する方向に前記一対の薄肉端部に向かって肉厚が薄くなるように、前記矩形状光 射出面に対して傾斜する傾斜背面を形成する一対の傾斜背面部と、を有し、前記平 行溝は、その直交方向の断面形状において、前記平行溝の前記矩形状光射出面に 垂直な中心線に対して前記矩形状光射出面に向かって前記平行溝の先端部分を 対称に細くなつており、前記矩形状光射出面に対する前記傾斜背面の角度 Φ 1 (rad )と両最端部間の距離 Wとの関係が、 Φ 1 X W≤ 200 (mm)を満足する導光板を提 供するものである。 [0019] In order to solve the above first problem, a first mode of the first aspect of the present invention is a transparent light guide plate, comprising a rectangular light exit surface, and a rectangular light exit surface. A pair of thick portions parallel to one side and located at a substantially central portion of a rectangular shape; and a pair of thick portions located outside the thick portion in a direction orthogonal to the one side and formed parallel to the thick portion. A parallel groove formed between the thin end portion and the bar-shaped light source and located between the pair of thick portions and opposite to the side on which the rectangular light emitting surface is formed and parallel to the one side. And symmetrical with respect to a plane including the axis of the rod-shaped light source and perpendicular to the rectangular light emitting surface, and extending from the thick portion toward the pair of thin ends in a direction orthogonal to the one side. A pair of inclined back surfaces that form an inclined back surface that is inclined with respect to the rectangular light exit surface so that the wall thickness is reduced, The row groove has a cross-sectional shape in a direction perpendicular to the rectangular groove, and a leading end portion of the parallel groove is symmetrically narrowed toward the rectangular light emitting surface with respect to a center line of the parallel groove perpendicular to the rectangular light emitting surface. A light guide plate in which the relationship between the angle Φ 1 (rad) of the inclined back surface with respect to the rectangular light exit surface and the distance W between both extreme ends satisfies Φ 1 XW ≤ 200 (mm). Things.
[0020] また、上記他の課題を解決するために、本発明の第 1の態様の第 2の形態は、複数 個の、本発明の第 1の態様の第 1の形態の導光板力 なり、矩形状光射出面が同一 方向となる様にその前記一対の薄肉端部の一方が互いに連結されていることを特徴 とする導光板を提供するものである。また、上記他の課題を解決するために、本発明 の第 1の態様の第 3の形態は、上記各導光板を繰返し単位とし、複数の繰返し単位 の連結部が継ぎ目なく一体となって並列して配置された構造を有する導光板を提供 するものである。 [0020] In order to solve the above-mentioned other problems, a second embodiment of the first embodiment of the present invention includes a plurality of light guide plates according to the first embodiment of the first embodiment of the present invention. Another object of the present invention is to provide a light guide plate characterized in that one of the pair of thin ends is connected to each other so that the rectangular light exit surfaces are in the same direction. In order to solve the above-mentioned other problems, a third embodiment of the first aspect of the present invention is directed to a third embodiment in which each of the light guide plates is used as a repeating unit and a plurality of repeating units are used. It is intended to provide a light guide plate having a structure in which the connecting portions are seamlessly integrated and arranged in parallel.
[0021] 本発明の第 1の態様の導光板においては、さらに、複数連結した場合の連結部に おける平行溝に垂直な断面の形状が円弧状、または多角形の形状を有することが好 ましい。  [0021] In the light guide plate according to the first aspect of the present invention, it is preferable that the shape of the cross section perpendicular to the parallel groove in the connecting portion when a plurality of the light guide plates are connected has an arc shape or a polygon shape. No.
また、この形状の導光板を繰返し単位とし、複数の繰返し単位が継ぎ目なく一体と なって並列して配置された構造を有する導光板であることがより好ましぐその繰返し 単位の連結部における前記矩形状光射出面に対する前記傾斜背面の角度 0> 2 (rad Further, it is more preferable that the light guide plate having this shape is a repetition unit, and it is more preferable that the light guide plate has a structure in which a plurality of repetition units are seamlessly united and arranged in parallel. Angle of the inclined back surface with respect to the rectangular light exit surface 0> 2 (rad
)が、 Φ 2く Φ 1を満足することが好ましい。 ) Preferably satisfies Φ 2 and Φ 1.
[0022] また、前記平行溝の断面形状において、前記先端部分は、前記棒状光源の中心 力 前記矩形状光射出面に向力 垂線に対する角度が、両側で 90度以内となる部 分であるのが好ましい。 [0022] In the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove, the tip portion is a portion in which the center force of the rod-shaped light source is directed to the rectangular light emitting surface and the angle with respect to the perpendicular is 90 degrees on both sides. Is preferred.
また、前記平行溝の断面形状において、前記先端部分は、前記棒状光源の中心 力 前記矩形状光射出面に向力 垂線に対する角度が、両側で 60度以内となる部 分であるのが好ましい。また、前記角度は、導光板の厚みや棒状光源の配置を考え た場合に、実質的に 20度以上であることが好ましい。  Further, in the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove, it is preferable that the front end portion is a portion where an angle with respect to a vertical force perpendicular to the central force of the rod-shaped light source is 60 degrees on both sides. Further, it is preferable that the angle is substantially 20 degrees or more in consideration of the thickness of the light guide plate and the arrangement of the bar-shaped light sources.
[0023] また、前記平行溝の少なくとも前記先端部分の断面形状が、互いに交わる先鋭な 1 つの交点を持つ、前記中心線に対して対称な 2つの直線または曲線の一部からなる のが好ましい。 [0023] It is preferable that the cross-sectional shape of at least the distal end portion of the parallel groove is a part of two straight lines or curves symmetrical with respect to the center line, each having one sharp intersection point intersecting with each other.
また、前記平行溝の少なくとも前記先端部分の断面形状、または、前記平行溝の断 面形状が、三角形であるのが好ましい。  Further, it is preferable that a cross-sectional shape of at least the distal end portion of the parallel groove or a cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove is a triangle.
また、前記平行溝の少なくとも前記先端部分の断面形状となる前記 2つの曲線が、 前記平行溝の中心に向力つて凸または凹であるのが好ま 、。  In addition, it is preferable that the two curves, which are the cross-sectional shapes of at least the distal end portion of the parallel groove, are convex or concave toward the center of the parallel groove.
また、前記平行溝の少なくとも前記先端部分の断面形状、または、前記平行溝の断 面形状となる前記 2つの曲線が、前記平行溝の中心に向かって凸または凹であって 、その形状が 10次の関数で近似される曲線であるのが好ましぐその曲線は円、楕 円、放物線、または双曲線の一部であるのがより好ましい。  Further, at least the cross-sectional shape of at least the distal end portion of the parallel groove or the two curves that are the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove is convex or concave toward the center of the parallel groove, and the shape is 10 or more. The curve, which is preferably a curve approximated by the following function, is more preferably a part of a circle, ellipse, parabola, or hyperbola.
[0024] また、前記平行溝の前記先端部分の頂部の断面形状が、前記対称な 2つの直線ま たは曲線が交わる前に互いに前記中心線に対して対称な直線または曲線で接続さ れた形状であるのが好ま 、。 [0024] Further, the cross-sectional shape of the top of the tip portion of the parallel groove may be between the two symmetrical straight lines. Preferably, the shapes are connected by a straight line or a curve symmetrical with respect to the center line before the curves intersect.
また、前記平行溝の前記先端部分の前記頂部の断面形状が、前記先鋭な 1つの 交点が面取りされた前記矩形状光射出面に平行な部分を持つ形状であるのが好ま しい。  Further, it is preferable that a cross-sectional shape of the top portion of the distal end portion of the parallel groove is a shape having a portion parallel to the rectangular light exit surface where the one sharp intersection is chamfered.
また、前記平行溝の少なくとも前記先端部分の断面形状、または、前記平行溝の断 面形状が、三角形であり、前記平行溝の前記先端部分の前記頂部の断面形状が、 前記中心線に対して対称な台形状であるのが好ましい。  Also, the cross-sectional shape of at least the tip portion of the parallel groove or the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove is triangular, and the cross-sectional shape of the top of the tip portion of the parallel groove with respect to the center line. Preferably, it has a symmetric trapezoidal shape.
なお、上記断面形状の説明において、三角形、台形とは、平行溝の断面を形成す る線が直線カゝら構成される場合に溝の開放部を直線で補完した場合に見える形状を 指すものとする。  In the above description of the cross-sectional shape, triangles and trapezoids indicate shapes that can be seen when the open part of the groove is complemented by a straight line when the line forming the cross-section of the parallel groove is constituted by a straight line. And
[0025] また、前記平行溝の前記先端部分の頂部の断面形状が、前記矩形状光射出面に 対して凸または凹の、前記中心線に対して対称な曲線状であるのが好ましい。  [0025] It is preferable that a cross-sectional shape of a top portion of the distal end portion of the parallel groove is a curved shape that is convex or concave with respect to the rectangular light emission surface and is symmetric with respect to the center line.
また、前記平行溝の前記先端部分の頂部の断面形状が、前記中心線に対して対 称に前記先鋭な 1つの交点が丸められた円形状、楕円形状、放物線状、または双曲 線状であるのが好ましい。  Further, the cross-sectional shape of the top of the tip portion of the parallel groove may be a circle, an ellipse, a parabola, or a hyperbolic shape in which the one point of intersection is symmetrically rounded with respect to the center line. Preferably it is.
[0026] また、前記平行溝の少なくとも前記先端部分の断面形状が、楕円形または双曲線 の一部であるのが好まし 、。 [0026] Preferably, at least the cross-sectional shape of the distal end portion of the parallel groove is an elliptical shape or a part of a hyperbola.
また、前記平行溝の前記先端部分の前記頂部が、砂ずり面であるのが好ましい。 また、前記矩形状光射出面の、前記平行溝の前記先端部分の前記頂部に相当す る部分に網点を有するのが好まし 、。  Further, it is preferable that the top portion of the tip portion of the parallel groove is a grit surface. Further, it is preferable that the rectangular light emitting surface has a halftone dot at a portion corresponding to the top of the tip portion of the parallel groove.
[0027] また、本発明においては、前記矩形状光射出面に対して垂直で前記棒状光源の 中心軸を含む面力 前記薄肉端部の端面までの距離を L (mm)とし、前記棒状光源 の中心から、前記矩形状光射出面に平行で前記傾斜背面との交点までの距離を Δ L (mm)、前記光透過性榭脂の光透過率を t %、前記交点から、前記矩形状光射出 面に対して垂直な方向における前記矩形状光射出面までの距離を D (mm)としたと きに、下記の式を満たすことが好ましい。 [0027] In the present invention, a surface force perpendicular to the rectangular light exit surface and including a central axis of the rod-shaped light source is a distance from the thin end portion to an end surface, L (mm), and the rod-shaped light source is ΔL (mm), the light transmittance of the light-transmitting resin is t%, the distance from the center of the rectangular light exit surface to the intersection with the inclined back surface is ΔL (mm). When the distance to the rectangular light emitting surface in a direction perpendicular to the light emitting surface is D (mm), it is preferable that the following formula be satisfied.
t= { l -kl X (D/L- A L) } X 100 0<kl≤2 t = {l -kl X (D / L- AL)} X 100 0 <kl≤2
[0028] また、前記棒状光源力 入射された光を出射面力 射出する際の前記光射出面に おける全光束量を I I  The total light flux on the light exit surface when the incident light is emitted from the rod-like light source is represented by I I.
BLU、前記棒状光源表面の全光束量を CFLとしたときに、前記矩形 状光射出面に対して垂直で前記棒状光源の中心軸を含む面から前記薄肉端部の 端面までの距離 L (mm) 1S 下記式を満足することが好ま ヽ。  BLU, when the total luminous flux on the surface of the rod-shaped light source is CFL, the distance L (mm) from the surface perpendicular to the rectangular light exit surface and including the center axis of the rod-shaped light source to the end surface of the thin end portion ) 1S It is preferable to satisfy the following equation.
L=k2 X (I /\ )  L = k2 X (I / \)
CFL BLU  CFL BLU
l≤k2≤160  l≤k2≤160
[0029] また、本発明においては、矩形状光射出面の前記平行溝に相当する第 1部分にお いて前記平行溝に収納された棒状光源力 の射出光によって形成される相対照度ま たは相対輝度のピーク値力 前記傾斜背面部に相当する第 2部分において前記射 出光によって形成される相対照度または相対輝度の平均値の 3倍以下となるように、 前記平行溝の前記直交方向の断面形状において、前記平行溝の前記矩形状光射 出面に垂直な中心線に対して、前記矩形状光射出面に向かって前記平行溝の先端 部分を対称に細くすることが好まし 、。  [0029] Further, in the present invention, in a first portion corresponding to the parallel groove of the rectangular light emitting surface, relative illuminance or relative illuminance formed by the emission light of the rod-like light source housed in the parallel groove. The peak value of relative brightness The cross section of the parallel groove in the orthogonal direction so that the relative brightness or the average value of relative brightness formed by the emitted light in the second portion corresponding to the inclined back surface portion is 3 times or less. In the shape, it is preferable that a tip end portion of the parallel groove is symmetrically narrowed toward the rectangular light emission surface with respect to a center line of the parallel groove perpendicular to the rectangular light emission surface.
また、前記矩形状光射出面の前記第 1部分の相対照度または相対輝度のピークは 、前記第 2部分の相対照度または相対輝度の平均値の 3倍以下であるのが好ましぐ 2倍以下であるのがより好ましい。  Further, the peak of the relative illuminance or relative luminance of the first portion of the rectangular light exit surface is preferably 3 times or less of the average value of the relative illuminance or relative luminance of the second portion, and is preferably 2 times or less. Is more preferable.
[0030] 本発明においては、前記矩形状光射出面の前記平行溝に相当する第 1部分にお いて前記平行溝に収納された棒状光源力 の射出光によって形成される相対照度ま たは相対輝度のピーク値の、前記傾斜背面部に相当する第 2部分において前記射 出光によって形成される相対照度または相対輝度の平均値に対する比に応じて、前 記平行溝の前記直交方向の断面形状において、前記平行溝の前記矩形状光射出 面に垂直な中心線に対して、前記矩形状光射出面に向かって前記平行溝の先端部 分を対称に細くなるように、設計することが好ましい。また、前記矩形状光射出面の前 記第 1部分の相対照度または相対輝度のピーク値が、前記第 2部分の相対照度また は相対輝度の平均値の 3倍以下となるように、前記平行溝の先端部分を対称に細く して設計することが好ま U、。  [0030] In the present invention, relative illuminance or relative illuminance formed by the rod-like light source power emitted from the rod-shaped light source housed in the parallel groove in the first portion corresponding to the parallel groove on the rectangular light emission surface. According to the ratio of the peak value of the luminance to the relative illuminance or the average value of the relative luminance formed by the emitted light in the second portion corresponding to the inclined back surface, the parallel groove has a cross-sectional shape in the orthogonal direction. It is preferable that the parallel groove is designed so that the leading end of the parallel groove is symmetrically narrowed toward the rectangular light emitting surface with respect to a center line perpendicular to the rectangular light emitting surface. In addition, the parallel light is adjusted so that a peak value of relative illuminance or relative luminance of the first portion of the rectangular light exit surface is three times or less of an average value of relative illuminance or relative luminance of the second portion. U, It is preferable to design the groove tip symmetrically thin.
[0031] また、上記第 2の課題を解決するために、本発明の第 2の態様は、上記第 1の態様 の各導光板と、前記導光板の前記平行溝に収納される棒状光源と、前記平行溝を 塞ぐように前記棒状光源を背後に設けられるリフレクタと、前記導光板の前記厚肉部 の両側の前記傾斜背面部の前記傾斜背面に取り付けられる反射シートとを有するこ とを特徴とする面状照明装置を提供するものである。 [0031] In order to solve the second problem, a second aspect of the present invention is directed to the first aspect. Each light guide plate, a rod-shaped light source housed in the parallel groove of the light guide plate, a reflector provided behind the rod-shaped light source so as to close the parallel groove, and both sides of the thick portion of the light guide plate And a reflecting sheet attached to the inclined back surface of the inclined back portion.
ここで、さらに、前記導光板の前記矩形状光射出面上に配置される拡散シートとを 有することが好ましぐ前記導光板の前記矩形状光射出面と前記拡散シートとの間に 配置されるプリズムシートを有するのが好まし 、。  Here, it is preferable that the light guide plate further includes a diffusion sheet disposed on the rectangular light emission surface of the light guide plate, and is disposed between the rectangular light emission surface of the light guide plate and the diffusion sheet. It is preferable to have a prism sheet.
また、前記導光板の前記矩形状光射出面の前記平行溝に相当する第 1部分にお いて前記平行溝に収納された棒状光源力 の射出光によって形成される相対照度ま たは相対輝度のピーク値の、前記傾斜背面部に相当する第 2部分において前記射 出光によって形成される相対照度または相対輝度の平均値に対する比は、前記導 光板の前記矩形状光射出面と前記拡散シートとの間に許容される間隔、または面状 照明装置に許容される厚み応じて設定されるのが好ましい。  Further, in a first portion corresponding to the parallel groove of the rectangular light exit surface of the light guide plate, relative illuminance or relative luminance formed by emission light of a rod-like light source force housed in the parallel groove. The ratio of the peak value to the average value of relative illuminance or relative luminance formed by the emitted light in the second portion corresponding to the inclined back surface portion is the ratio between the rectangular light emitting surface of the light guide plate and the diffusion sheet. It is preferable that the distance is set in accordance with the interval allowed between the two or the thickness allowed in the planar lighting device.
[0032] また、上記第 3の課題を解決するために、本発明の第 3の態様は、上記第 2の態様 の面状照明装置力もなるバックライトユニットと、このバックライトユニットの光射出面側 に配置される液晶表示パネルと、前記バックライトユニットおよび前記液晶表示パネ ルを駆動する駆動ユニットとを有することを特徴とする液晶表示装置を提供するもの である。 [0032] In order to solve the third problem, a third aspect of the present invention is directed to a backlight unit which also has the surface illumination device power of the second aspect, and a light exit surface of the backlight unit. The present invention provides a liquid crystal display device comprising: a liquid crystal display panel disposed on a side thereof; and a drive unit for driving the backlight unit and the liquid crystal display panel.
発明の効果  The invention's effect
[0033] 本発明の第 1の態様によれば、導光板に形成された平行溝に光源を収容すること ができるので、導光板を従来よりも薄型化および軽量ィ匕することができ、光射出面に 対する傾斜面の角度 Φ 1 (rad)と両最端部間の距離 Wとの関係力 Φ 1 XW≤200 ( mm)を満足することにより、その光射出面力 より均一でむらの少ない、かつより高輝 度な照明光を出射することができる。  According to the first aspect of the present invention, since the light source can be accommodated in the parallel groove formed in the light guide plate, the light guide plate can be made thinner and lighter than before, and By satisfying the relational force Φ 1 XW≤200 (mm) between the angle Φ 1 (rad) of the inclined surface with respect to the exit surface and the distance W between the two extreme ends, the light exit surface force is more uniform and uneven. It is possible to emit less and higher brightness illumination light.
また、さらには、平行溝の断面形状を、光射出面に向力 先端部分に向力つて細く していくことにより、照度または輝度のピークを低減でき、光射出面における照度また は輝度をより均一化することができ、光射出面に要求される均一度を達成することが できる。また、複数の導光板を連結しても、連結部分での輝線の発生を低減すること ができる。 Furthermore, by reducing the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove toward the light exit surface and toward the tip, the peak of illuminance or luminance can be reduced, and the illuminance or luminance at the light exit surface can be further improved. The uniformity can be achieved, and the uniformity required for the light exit surface can be achieved. In addition, even if a plurality of light guide plates are connected, it is necessary to reduce the occurrence of bright lines at the connection portions. Can do.
[0034] また、本発明の第 1の態様の第 2の形態によれば、第 1の形態の導光板の薄肉端部 を互いに連結することにより、導光板の光射出面のサイズを、より大サイズとすること ができる。また、本発明の第 1の態様の第 3の形態によれば、第 1の形態の導光板の 薄肉端部が互いに一体となって連結されるので、導光板の光射出面のサイズを、より 大きなサイズとすることができるとともに、連結部における輝線の発生を抑制すること ができ、連結部に継ぎ目がない一体成型とすることで連結部における反射がなぐ連 結部付近に向力う光の一部は隣接する繰返し単位力 射出されることで連結部付近 の光射出量の変化が抑えられる。  [0034] Further, according to the second mode of the first mode of the present invention, by connecting the thin end portions of the light guide plate of the first mode to each other, the size of the light exit surface of the light guide plate can be further increased. It can be large. Further, according to the third aspect of the first aspect of the present invention, since the thin end portions of the light guide plate of the first aspect are integrally connected to each other, the size of the light exit surface of the light guide plate is reduced. It is possible to increase the size and to suppress the generation of bright lines at the connecting part. A part of the light is emitted by the adjacent repetitive unit force, so that the change of the light emission amount near the connection part is suppressed.
[0035] また、本発明の第 2の態様によれば、上記第 1の態様の導光板を用いることにより、 薄型で軽量であり、より低コストで製造することができ、より均一でむらの少ない、かつ より高輝度な照明光を出射することのでき、また、照明表面を大サイズとすることがで き、または、壁掛けテレビなどの液晶表示装置に適用することができる面状照明装置 を提供することができる。  Further, according to the second aspect of the present invention, by using the light guide plate of the first aspect, the light guide plate can be manufactured to be thinner and lighter, can be manufactured at lower cost, and can be made more uniform and uneven. A planar lighting device capable of emitting less and higher-intensity illumination light, having a larger illumination surface, or being applicable to a liquid crystal display device such as a wall-mounted television. Can be provided.
[0036] また、本発明の第 3の態様によれば、上記第 2の態様の面状照明装置を用いること により、薄型で軽量であり、より低コストで製造することができ、より均一でむらの少な い、かつより高輝度な表示を行うことができ、また、その表示画面を大サイズとすること ができ、あるいは、壁掛けテレビなどの壁掛け型とすることができる液晶照明装置を 提供することができる。  [0036] Further, according to the third aspect of the present invention, by using the spread illuminating apparatus of the second aspect described above, it is possible to manufacture the thin and light-weight device at a lower cost, and to reduce the cost. Provided is a liquid crystal lighting device which can perform display with less unevenness and higher brightness, can have a large display screen, or can be a wall-mounted type such as a wall-mounted television. be able to.
図面の簡単な説明  Brief Description of Drawings
[0037] [図 1]図 1は、本発明の導光板を複数並列して配置した場合の概略構成断面図であ る。  FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a configuration in which a plurality of light guide plates of the present invention are arranged in parallel.
[図 2]図 2Aおよび図 2Bは、それぞれ、本発明の導光板を有するバックライトユニット を用いた液晶表示装置の概略斜視図および概略断面図であり、図 2Cは、導光板の 概略断面図である。  2A and 2B are a schematic perspective view and a schematic sectional view, respectively, of a liquid crystal display device using a backlight unit having the light guide plate of the present invention, and FIG. 2C is a schematic sectional view of the light guide plate. It is.
[図 3]図 3Aは、反射シートと導光板の傾斜面との間にプリズムシートが配置されてい る様子を示す概略断面図であり、図 3Bは、反射シートと導光板の傾斜面との間に配 置されているプリズムシートを導光板側カゝら見た概略平面図および概略横断面図で ある。 FIG. 3A is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a state in which a prism sheet is disposed between a reflection sheet and an inclined surface of a light guide plate, and FIG. FIG. 3 is a schematic plan view and a schematic cross-sectional view of the prism sheet disposed therebetween viewed from the light guide plate side. is there.
[図 4]図 4Aは、導光板を複数連結したときに導光板同士が接続される傾斜面の最端 部近傍の断面形状を曲線形状にした場合の最端部近傍の部分拡大断面図であり、 図 4Bは、導光板を複数連結したときに導光板同士が接続される傾斜面の最端部近 傍の断面形状を多角形形状にした場合の最端部近傍の部分拡大断面図である。  FIG. 4A is a partially enlarged cross-sectional view near the extreme end when the cross-sectional shape near the extreme end of the inclined surface to which the light guide plates are connected when a plurality of light guide plates are connected is curved. Fig.4B is a partial enlarged cross-sectional view near the extreme end when the cross-sectional shape near the extreme end of the inclined surface where the light guide plates are connected when a plurality of light guide plates are connected is polygonal. is there.
[図 5]図 5は、本発明の導光板の光出射の原理を説明するための図である。 FIG. 5 is a diagram for explaining the principle of light emission of the light guide plate of the present invention.
[図 6]図 6A〜図 6Eは、それぞれ、 3個の導光板を連結したときの導光板の光射出面 における輝度分布を示すグラフである。 6A to 6E are graphs each showing a luminance distribution on a light emitting surface of a light guide plate when three light guide plates are connected. FIG.
[図 7]図 7は、図 6A〜図 6Eのグラフをまとめて示したグラフである。  FIG. 7 is a graph collectively showing the graphs of FIGS. 6A to 6E.
[図 8]図 8A〜図 8Dは、それぞれ、連結部における光射出面に対する傾斜面の角度 Φ 2を、連結部以外の傾斜面の角度 Φ 1よりも小さくした導光板を 3個連結したときの 光射出面における輝度分布のグラフである。 [FIG. 8] FIGS. 8A to 8D show three light guide plates in which the angle Φ 2 of the inclined surface with respect to the light exit surface at the connecting portion is smaller than the angle Φ 1 of the inclined surface other than the connecting portion. 5 is a graph of a luminance distribution on the light exit surface of FIG.
[図 9]図 9は、図 8A〜図 8Dに示したグラフをまとめて示した図である。  FIG. 9 is a diagram collectively showing the graphs shown in FIGS. 8A to 8D.
[図 10]図 10A〜図 10Eは、 6個の導光板を連結したときの光射出面における輝度分 布を示すグラフである。  FIG. 10A to FIG. 10E are graphs showing luminance distribution on a light exit surface when six light guide plates are connected.
[図 11]図 11は、図 10A〜図 10Eに示したグラフをまとめて示した図である。  FIG. 11 is a diagram collectively showing the graphs shown in FIGS. 10A to 10E.
[図 12]図 12A〜図 12Cは、 9個の導光板を連結したときの光射出面における輝度分 布を示すグラフである。  FIG. 12A to FIG. 12C are graphs showing a luminance distribution on a light exit surface when nine light guide plates are connected.
[図 13]図 13Dおよび図 13Eは、 9個の導光板を連結したときの光射出面における輝 度分布を示すグラフであって、図 12A〜図 12Cに示したグラフと傾斜角度の異なる 場合である。  [FIG. 13] FIGS. 13D and 13E are graphs showing the brightness distribution on the light exit surface when nine light guide plates are connected, where the inclination angles are different from the graphs shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C. It is.
[図 14]図 14は、図 12A〜図 12C、図 13Dおよび図 13Eに示したグラフをまとめて示 した図である。  FIG. 14 is a view collectively showing the graphs shown in FIGS. 12A to 12C, FIG. 13D, and FIG. 13E.
[図 15]図 15は、平行溝の長さ方向に垂直な断面形状が双曲線の場合の導光板の概 略断面図である。  FIG. 15 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the light guide plate when the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the length direction of the parallel groove is hyperbolic.
[図 16]図 16は、平行溝の長さ方向に垂直な断面形状が楕円形の場合の導光板の概 略断面図である。  FIG. 16 is a schematic cross-sectional view of the light guide plate when the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the length direction of the parallel groove is elliptical.
[図 17]図 17は、平行溝の長さ方向に垂直な断面形状が、平行溝の中心を通り導光 板の光射出面に垂直な中心線に対して対称な 2つの円弧曲線の一部力 形成され て 、る導光板の概略断面図である。 [FIG. 17] FIG. 17 shows that the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the length direction of the parallel groove passes through the center of the parallel groove and guides the light. FIG. 4 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a light guide plate formed by partially forming two arc curves symmetric with respect to a center line perpendicular to a light exit surface of the plate.
[図 18]図 18は、平行溝の長さ方向に垂直な断面形状が、平行溝の中心を通り導光 板の光射出面に垂直な中心線に対して対称な 2つの放物線の一部力 形成されて V、る導光板の概略断面図である。  [Figure 18] Figure 18 shows a part of two parabolas whose cross section perpendicular to the length direction of the parallel groove is symmetrical with respect to the center line passing through the center of the parallel groove and perpendicular to the light exit surface of the light guide plate. FIG. 4 is a schematic sectional view of a light guide plate formed by force.
[図 19]図 19は、平行溝の長さ方向に垂直な断面形状が、平行溝の中心に向力つて 凸の 2つの曲線力 形成されている導光板の概略断面図である。  [FIG. 19] FIG. 19 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a light guide plate in which a cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the length direction of a parallel groove is formed with two curved forces convex toward the center of the parallel groove.
[図 20]図 20は、平行溝の長さ方向に垂直な断面形状が、平行溝の中心に向カゝつて 凸の曲線と凹の曲線を組み合わせた曲線力 形成されて 、る導光板の概略断面図 である。  [FIG. 20] FIG. 20 shows that the cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the length direction of the parallel groove has a curved force formed by combining a convex curve and a concave curve toward the center of the parallel groove. It is a schematic sectional view.
[図 21]図 21は、導光板の光射出面側に形成される網点パターンの例である。  FIG. 21 is an example of a halftone dot pattern formed on the light exit surface side of a light guide plate.
[図 22]図 22は、導光板の平行溝の断面形状を種々の形状に変更したときの、導光 板の光射出面から出射する光の照度分布を示すグラフである。  FIG. 22 is a graph showing the illuminance distribution of light emitted from the light exit surface of the light guide plate when the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove of the light guide plate is changed to various shapes.
[図 23]図 23は、平行溝の最深部を平坦ィ匕し、その平坦部分の長さを種々の値に変 化させたときに導光板の光射出面力 出射する光の照度分布を示すグラフである。  FIG. 23 is a graph showing the illuminance distribution of light emitted from the light guide plate when the deepest portion of the parallel groove is flattened and the length of the flat portion is changed to various values. It is a graph shown.
[図 24]図 24A〜図 24Dは、それぞれ、平行溝の最深部の平坦部分の長さが 1. 5m m、 1. Omm、 0. 5mm、 0. 25mmの場合の導光板の概略断面図である。  [FIG. 24] FIGS. 24A to 24D are schematic cross-sectional views of the light guide plate when the flat portions at the deepest portions of the parallel grooves are 1.5 mm, 1. Omm, 0.5 mm, and 0.25 mm, respectively. It is.
[図 25]図 25は、平行溝の最深部の形状を曲率半径 Rの曲面形状にし、その曲面の 曲率半径を種々の値に変化させたときに導光板の光射出面力 出射する光の照度 分布を示すグラフである。  [FIG. 25] FIG. 25 is a graph showing the light exit surface force of the light guide plate when the shape of the deepest portion of the parallel groove is a curved surface having a radius of curvature R and the radius of curvature of the curved surface is changed to various values. It is a graph which shows illuminance distribution.
[図 26]図 26A〜図 26Dは、それぞれ、断面形状が三角形の平行溝の頂点部分の曲 率半径が 0. 25mm, 0. 5mm、 1. Omm、 1. 5mmの場合の導光板の概略断面図 である。  [FIG. 26] FIGS. 26A to 26D are schematic diagrams of light guide plates when the radii of curvature at the apexes of parallel grooves having a triangular cross section are 0.25 mm, 0.5 mm, 1.0 mm, and 1.5 mm, respectively. It is sectional drawing.
[図 27]図 27Aは、本発明の導光板の側面に反射板を配置した構成例であり、図 27B は本発明の導光板を並列して配置したときに導光板の側面に反射板を配置した構 成例である。  FIG. 27A is a configuration example in which a reflector is disposed on the side surface of the light guide plate of the present invention, and FIG. 27B is a configuration example in which the reflector is disposed on the side surface of the light guide plate when the light guide plates of the present invention are arranged in parallel. This is an example of the configuration in which they are arranged.
[図 28]図 28は、ノ ックライトユニットを収容する筐体の概略構成図である。  [FIG. 28] FIG. 28 is a schematic configuration diagram of a housing for housing the knock light unit.
[図 29]図 29は、バックライトユニットと液晶表示パネルが収容された筐体の模式的斜 視図である。 [FIG. 29] FIG. 29 is a schematic oblique view of a housing accommodating a backlight unit and a liquid crystal display panel. FIG.
[図 30]図 30は、バックライトユニットと液晶表示パネルが収容された筐体の模式的断 面図である。  FIG. 30 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a housing containing a backlight unit and a liquid crystal display panel.
[図 31]図 31は、図 30に示した筐体の両端部の模式的拡大断面図である。  FIG. 31 is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view of both ends of the housing shown in FIG. 30.
[図 32]図 32Aは、本発明のバックライトユニットに用いる光源の一例を示す概略断面 図であり、図 32Bは、光源の位置決め手段の一例を示す概略斜視図であり、図 32C は、図 32Aおよび図 32Bに示した光源の概略断面図である。 FIG. 32A is a schematic sectional view showing an example of a light source used in the backlight unit of the present invention, FIG. 32B is a schematic perspective view showing an example of a light source positioning means, and FIG. FIG. 32B is a schematic sectional view of the light source shown in FIG. 32A and FIG. 32B.
[図 33]図 33は、平行溝に、光源と平行溝とが直接接触しないようにするためのリブが 形成された導光板の模式図である。  FIG. 33 is a schematic diagram of a light guide plate in which ribs are formed in parallel grooves to prevent a light source from being in direct contact with the parallel grooves.
圆 34]図 34Aおよび図 34Bは、それぞれ、反射シートと、光源を含む導光板とを一体 化した構成を模式的に示した平面図および側面図であり、図 34Cは、図 34Aの C C線矢視図であり、図 34Dは、図 34Aの D— D線矢視図である。 34] FIG. 34A and FIG. 34B are a plan view and a side view schematically showing a configuration in which a reflection sheet and a light guide plate including a light source are integrated, respectively. FIG. 34C is a CC line of FIG. 34A. FIG. 34D is a view taken in the direction of the arrow, and FIG. 34D is a view taken in the direction of the arrow DD in FIG. 34A.
[図 35]図 35は、網点が形成された網点シートが、連結された複数の導光板の光射出 面を覆うように配置された様子を示す模式図である。 FIG. 35 is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a halftone sheet having halftone dots formed thereon is arranged so as to cover the light exit surfaces of a plurality of connected light guide plates.
[図 36]図 36Aは、本発明の導光板の光源の長手方向の側面に反射板を配置した構 成例であり、図 36Bは、図 36Aの断面図である。  36A is a configuration example of a light guide plate of the present invention in which a reflector is disposed on a side surface in the longitudinal direction of a light source, and FIG. 36B is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 36A.
[図 37]図 37Aは、本発明の導光板の他の一例を示す概略斜視図であり、図 37Bは、 図 37Aの B— B線断面図であり、図 37Cは、図 37Aの C— C線断面図であり、図 37D は、図 37Aの D— D線断面図である。  FIG. 37A is a schematic perspective view showing another example of the light guide plate of the present invention, FIG. 37B is a sectional view taken along line BB of FIG. 37A, and FIG. 37C is a sectional view taken along line C—B of FIG. 37A. FIG. 37D is a sectional view taken along line C-D, and FIG. 37D is a sectional view taken along line DD in FIG. 37A.
[図 38]図 38は、幅の異なる導光板を複数連結した導光板の他の一例を示す概略断 面図である。  FIG. 38 is a schematic cross-sectional view showing another example of a light guide plate in which a plurality of light guide plates having different widths are connected.
[図 39]図 39は、光射出面が R形状を有する導光板の一例を示す概略断面図である。  FIG. 39 is a schematic sectional view showing an example of a light guide plate having a light exit surface having an R shape.
[図 40]図 40Aは、光源の長手方向における導光板の端部が傾斜を有する形状の一 例を示す概略断面図であり、図 40Bは、光射出面と平行で、かつ光源の長手方向と 直交する方向の導光板の端部が傾斜を有する形状の一例を示す概略斜視図であり 、図 40Cは、図 40Bの C— C線断面図である。 FIG. 40A is a schematic cross-sectional view showing an example of a shape in which the end of the light guide plate in the longitudinal direction of the light source has an inclination. FIG. 40B is parallel to the light exit surface and in the longitudinal direction of the light source. FIG. 40C is a schematic perspective view showing an example of a shape in which the end of the light guide plate in a direction perpendicular to FIG. 40 is inclined, and FIG. 40C is a cross-sectional view taken along line CC in FIG. 40B.
[図 41]図 41Aは、光射出面の光源の長手方向の断面形状が曲線となる緩やかな曲 面形状の導光板の一例を示す概略斜視図であり、図 41Bは、光射出面状に光源の 長手方向と直交する方向に延在する微小高さのリブを有する導光板の一例を示す概 略斜視図である。 [FIG. 41] FIG. 41A is a schematic perspective view showing an example of a light guide plate having a gentle curved surface in which a light emitting surface has a curved cross-sectional shape in the longitudinal direction of a light source. FIG. 41B is a light emitting surface. Light source FIG. 4 is a schematic perspective view showing an example of a light guide plate having a rib with a minute height extending in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction.
[図 42]図 42は、ノ ックライトユニットを背面側から見た概略斜視図である。  FIG. 42 is a schematic perspective view of the knock light unit as viewed from the rear side.
[図 43]図 43は、従来の導光板を有する面光源装置の概略断面図である。  FIG. 43 is a schematic sectional view of a surface light source device having a conventional light guide plate.
[図 44]図 44は、図 43の面光源装置の導光板の出射面における輝度のグラフである 発明を実施するための最良の形態  [FIG. 44] FIG. 44 is a graph of luminance at an emission surface of a light guide plate of the surface light source device of FIG. 43. BEST MODE FOR CARRYING OUT THE INVENTION
[0038] 本発明に係る導光板、これを用いる面状照明装置および液晶表示装置を、添付の 図面に示される好適実施形態に基づいて以下に詳細に説明する。  A light guide plate, a planar lighting device and a liquid crystal display device using the same according to the present invention will be described in detail below based on preferred embodiments shown in the accompanying drawings.
[0039] 図 1に、本発明の第 1の態様の導光板 18を複数並列して構成した本発明の第 2の 態様の面状照明装置 1 (以下、バックライトユニットともいう)の概略断面図を示す。こ のような面状照明装置 2は、本発明の第 3の態様の液晶表示装置のノ ックライトュ- ットとして用いられる。図 2Aおよび図 2Bには、図 1に示したバックライトユニット 2の一 つの導光板 18の部分と、そのバックライトユニット 2を用いた液晶表示装置 10の概略 部分斜視図と概略部分断面図を示す。また、図 2Cには、本発明の導光板の概略断 面図を示した。図 2Aおよび図 2Bに示すように、液晶表示装置 10は、基本的に、バッ クライトユニット 2と、バックライトユニット 2の光射出面側に配置される液晶表示パネル 4と、それらを駆動するための駆動ユニット 6とを有する。ノ ックライトユニット 2は、冷陰 極管 12と、拡散シート 14と、プリズムシート 16、 17と、導光板 18と、リフレクタ 20と、 反射板 22とを備える。  FIG. 1 is a schematic cross-sectional view of a planar lighting device 1 (hereinafter, also referred to as a backlight unit) according to a second embodiment of the present invention in which a plurality of light guide plates 18 according to the first embodiment of the present invention are arranged in parallel. The figure is shown. Such a planar illumination device 2 is used as a knock light cut of the liquid crystal display device according to the third embodiment of the present invention. FIGS. 2A and 2B are a schematic partial perspective view and a schematic partial cross-sectional view of a portion of one light guide plate 18 of the backlight unit 2 shown in FIG. 1 and a liquid crystal display device 10 using the backlight unit 2. Show. FIG. 2C shows a schematic cross-sectional view of the light guide plate of the present invention. As shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B, the liquid crystal display device 10 basically includes a backlight unit 2, a liquid crystal display panel 4 arranged on the light emission surface side of the backlight unit 2, and a drive unit for driving the liquid crystal display panel 4. Drive unit 6. The knock light unit 2 includes a cold cathode tube 12, a diffusion sheet 14, prism sheets 16, 17, a light guide plate 18, a reflector 20, and a reflection plate 22.
[0040] 図 2Aおよび図 2Bに示した液晶表示装置において、液晶表示パネル 4には、例え ば、 GH, PC, TN, STN, ECB, PDLC, IPS (In -Plane Switching) , VA(Ver tical Aligned)方式の各種(MVA, PVA, EVA)、 OCB、強誘電性液晶、反強誘 電性液晶などの液晶表示モードに従う液晶表示パネルを利用することができる。また 、液晶表示パネル 4の駆動方式も特に限定されず、単純マトリクス方式、アクティブマ トリタス方式など既に知られた駆動方式を利用することができる。  In the liquid crystal display device shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B, the liquid crystal display panel 4 includes, for example, GH, PC, TN, STN, ECB, PDLC, IPS (In-Plane Switching), VA (Vertical). Various types of liquid crystal display panels (MVA, PVA, EVA), OCB, ferroelectric liquid crystal, antiferroelectric liquid crystal, and other liquid crystal display modes can be used. The driving method of the liquid crystal display panel 4 is not particularly limited, and a known driving method such as a simple matrix method or an active matrix method can be used.
[0041] バックライトユニット 2は、液晶表示パネル 4の背後から、液晶表示パネル 4の全面に 均一な光を照射するための面状照明装置であり、液晶表示パネル 4の画像表示面と 略同一の光射出面 (発光面)を有する。バックライトユニット 2は、図 2A〜図 2Cに示 すように、基本的には、光源 12と、拡散シート 14と、 2枚のプリズムシート 16および 17 と、導光板 18と、リフレクタ 20と、反射シート 22とを有する。 The backlight unit 2 is a planar illumination device for irradiating the entire surface of the liquid crystal display panel 4 with uniform light from behind the liquid crystal display panel 4. It has substantially the same light emitting surface (light emitting surface). As shown in FIGS. 2A to 2C, the backlight unit 2 basically includes a light source 12, a diffusion sheet 14, two prism sheets 16 and 17, a light guide plate 18, a reflector 20, And a reflection sheet 22.
[0042] このバックライトユニット 2の駆動方法は、特に限定されず、例えば、周囲の環境を 監視して輝度変調を行うように駆動させてもよい。例えば、外光センサを設けて周囲 の明るさを検出したり、温度センサを設けて周囲の温度を検出したりすることによって 、明るさまたは温度に応じて輝度を変調させてもよい。また、ノ ックライトユニット 2の駆 動方式も特に限定されず、例えば、 R (赤)、 G (緑)、 B (青)の各光源 (例えば、 LED 光源)を用いるとともに、それら各光源を液晶表示パネル 4の表示に合わせて順次点 灯させるフィールドシーケンシャル方式により駆動させてもよいし、液晶の走査表示に 合わせて順次または同時に発光または消灯させる間欠点灯方式により駆動させても ょ 、。フィールドシーケンシャル方式を用いてバックライトユニット 2を駆動させれば、 R、 G、 Bの各カラーフィルタを除去することができるので、カラーフィルタによる光量の 損失を解消することができる。また、間欠点灯方式に従って光源を短時間点灯させれ ば、動画の表示性能を向上させることが可能となる。  [0042] The method of driving the backlight unit 2 is not particularly limited. For example, the backlight unit 2 may be driven so as to monitor the surrounding environment and perform luminance modulation. For example, the luminance may be modulated according to the brightness or the temperature by providing an external light sensor to detect the surrounding brightness, or by providing a temperature sensor to detect the surrounding temperature. The driving method of the knock light unit 2 is not particularly limited. For example, R (red), G (green), and B (blue) light sources (for example, LED light sources) are used, and these light sources are used. It may be driven by a field sequential method in which the liquid crystal display panel 4 is sequentially turned on in accordance with the display, or may be driven by an intermittent lighting method in which light is emitted or turned off sequentially or simultaneously with the scanning display of the liquid crystal. If the backlight unit 2 is driven using the field sequential method, the R, G, and B color filters can be removed, so that the loss of light amount due to the color filters can be eliminated. In addition, if the light source is turned on for a short time according to the intermittent lighting method, it is possible to improve the display performance of moving images.
[0043] なお、ノ ックライトユニット 2を構成する上記構成部材は、図 28に示すように、筐体 2 80内に配置され、ノ ックライトユニット 2の背面側から固定されることにより、一体化し て構成してもよい。筐体 280は、図 28に示すように、一方の面が開放された箱型の構 造を有し、バックライトユニットの光射出面が位置する側には矩形状の開口が形成さ れている。  The above-mentioned constituent members constituting the knock light unit 2 are arranged in a housing 280 as shown in FIG. 28, and are fixed from the rear side of the knock light unit 2 to be integrated. It may be configured as a single unit. As shown in FIG. 28, the housing 280 has a box-shaped structure with one surface opened, and a rectangular opening is formed on the side where the light emission surface of the backlight unit is located. I have.
このような筐体 280としては、例えば、榭脂または金属で形成される箱型構造の筐 体、金属で形成される骨格構造のフレーム、金属以外の剛性の強い樹脂で形成され る箱型構造の筐体あるいは骨格構造のフレーム、金属および剛性の強い樹脂で形 成され、導光板 18の平行溝と直行する方向に向かって延設されたリブを有する筐体 などを挙げることができる。  Examples of such a housing 280 include a box-shaped housing made of resin or metal, a frame of a skeleton structure made of metal, and a box-shaped structure made of a rigid resin other than metal. And a frame having a skeletal structure, a metal and a rigid resin, and a rib having a rib extending in a direction perpendicular to the parallel groove of the light guide plate 18.
榭脂で形成される筐体 280にバックライトユニット 2の構成部材を組み込む場合に は、図 28に示すように、バックライトユニットを挟持するッメ部 281を筐体 280に設け、 このッメ部 281で、ノ ックライトユニット 2の反射シート 22などを挟み込むこともできる。 [0044] 図 28では、バックライトユニット 2を構成する構成部材を筐体 280内に配置させた構 成を示したが、バックライトユニットと液晶表示パネルを 1つの筐体内に配置させた構 成にしてもよい。図 29〜図 31に、ノ ックライトユニットと液晶表示パネルを収容する筐 体の構成例を示した。図 29は、ノ ックライトユニット(図示しない)と液晶表示パネル 4 が収容された筐体 290の模式的斜視図であり、図 30は、バックライトユニット 2と液晶 表示パネルが収容された筐体 290の模式的断面図である。また、図 31は、図 30に 示した筐体 290の両端部の模式的拡大断面図である。 When the constituent members of the backlight unit 2 are incorporated in the housing 280 made of a resin, as shown in FIG. 28, a housing 281 for holding the backlight unit is provided on the housing 280. In the section 281, the reflection sheet 22 of the knock light unit 2 can be inserted. FIG. 28 shows a configuration in which the constituent members of the backlight unit 2 are disposed in the housing 280, but a configuration in which the backlight unit and the liquid crystal display panel are disposed in one housing. It may be. Fig. 29 to Fig. 31 show the configuration examples of the housing that houses the knock light unit and the liquid crystal display panel. FIG. 29 is a schematic perspective view of a housing 290 accommodating a knock light unit (not shown) and the liquid crystal display panel 4, and FIG. 30 is a housing accommodating the backlight unit 2 and the liquid crystal display panel. 290 is a schematic sectional view of FIG. FIG. 31 is a schematic enlarged cross-sectional view of both ends of the housing 290 shown in FIG.
ノ ックライトユニットと液晶表示パネルを収容する筐体は、バックライトユニットを専用 の筐体に収容し、そのバックライトユニット用筐体に収容されたバックライトユニットと 液晶表示パネルを収容させる構成としてもょ 、し、ノ ックライトユニットをバックライトュ ニット用の筐体に収容させずに、ノ ックライトユニット本体と液晶表示パネルとを固定 して収容させる構成としてもょ 、。  The housing that houses the knock light unit and the liquid crystal display panel has a configuration in which the backlight unit is housed in a dedicated housing, and the backlight unit and the liquid crystal display panel that are housed in the housing for the backlight unit are housed. Alternatively, the knock light unit and the liquid crystal display panel may be fixed and accommodated without accommodating the knock light unit in the housing for the backlight unit.
[0045] 図 2Aおよび図 2Bにおいて、光源 12は、細径の棒状の冷陰極管であり、液晶表示 パネル 4を照明するために用いられる。光源 12は、導光板 18に形成された平行溝 1 8f内に配置され、駆動ユニット 6と接続されている。ここでは、光源 12として冷陰極管 を用いたが、本発明はこれに限定されず、棒状光源であれば、どのようなものでもよ い。光源 12としては、例えば、通常の蛍光管、冷陰極管、熱陰極管、外部電極管、 発光ダイオード (LED)、半導体レーザ等の光源を用いることができ、特に、冷陰極管 、外部電極管または発光ダイオードが好ましい。  2A and 2B, the light source 12 is a small-diameter rod-shaped cold cathode tube, and is used to illuminate the liquid crystal display panel 4. The light source 12 is arranged in a parallel groove 18f formed in the light guide plate 18, and is connected to the drive unit 6. Here, a cold cathode tube is used as the light source 12, but the present invention is not limited to this, and any rod-shaped light source may be used. As the light source 12, for example, a light source such as a normal fluorescent tube, a cold cathode tube, a hot cathode tube, an external electrode tube, a light emitting diode (LED), or a semiconductor laser can be used. Alternatively, a light emitting diode is preferred.
また、導光板 18の平行溝 18fと同等の長さを有する円柱状または角柱状の透明な 導光体を用い、その導光体の上面および底面に LEDを配置した LED光源を光源 1 2の代わりに用いても良い。このような LED光源は、導光体の上面および底面から L EDの光を入射して導光体の側面力も LEDの光を出射することができる。  Further, a cylindrical or prismatic transparent light guide having the same length as the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18 is used, and an LED light source having LEDs arranged on the top and bottom surfaces of the light guide is used as the light source 12. It may be used instead. In such an LED light source, the light of the LED can be incident from the top and bottom surfaces of the light guide, and the lateral force of the light guide can also emit the LED light.
[0046] また、光源として、図 32Aに示すような、アパーチャ一タイプのランプを用いても良 い。本発明において、アパーチャ一タイプのランプとは、出射したい角度を除いた部 分に反射率の高 ヽ部材を設け、つまり光を出射させな 、部分に反射率の高 ヽ部材を 設け、所定角度から出射される光の光量を増加させる棒状光源を言う。図 32Cには、 アパーチャ一タイプのランプの断面図を示した。図 32Cにおいて、領域 320が光出 射領域である。アパーチャ一タイプのランプを用いることで、光の利用効率をより向上 させることができる。また、光源の背面側に配置する反射シート(リフレクタ)を必ずしも 設ける必要がなくなり、装置構成をより簡単にすることができ、反射シートの取り付け 誤差による輝度むらの発生も防止できる。 As the light source, an aperture-type lamp as shown in FIG. 32A may be used. In the present invention, an aperture-type lamp is provided with a high-reflectance member at a portion other than an angle at which light is to be emitted, that is, a high-reflectance member is provided at a portion where light is not emitted, and a predetermined angle is provided. Refers to a rod-like light source that increases the amount of light emitted from the light source. FIG. 32C shows a cross-sectional view of an aperture-type lamp. In FIG. 32C, the area 320 emits light. Area. By using an aperture-type lamp, the light use efficiency can be further improved. Further, it is not always necessary to provide a reflection sheet (reflector) disposed on the back side of the light source, so that the configuration of the apparatus can be simplified, and the occurrence of uneven brightness due to a mounting error of the reflection sheet can be prevented.
ここで、反射率の高い部材としては、金属、非金属の各種材料を用いることができ、 特に非金属の材料を用いることが好ましい。反射率の高い部材として、非金属の材 料を用いることで、リーク電流を低くすることができる。  Here, various materials such as metal and nonmetal can be used as the member having high reflectance, and it is particularly preferable to use nonmetal material. By using a nonmetallic material as a member having a high reflectivity, the leakage current can be reduced.
[0047] さらに、アパーチャ一タイプのランプを用いる場合は、少なくとも一ヶ所に位置決め 手段を設けることが好ましい。位置決め手段としては、例えば、図 32Bに示すように、 ランプの端子部に屈曲部 322を設け、ランプを支持する支持部材 324に溝 326を形 成し、支持部材 324の溝 326に屈曲部 322を嵌入させてランプを固定する方法等が ある。また、ランプの端子部に設ける屈曲部 322の角度は導光板の平行溝に対して 規定可能なものであればどのような角度であっても良ぐ図 32Cの右図に示すように 、アパーチャ一タイプのランプの光出射領域 320が二等分されるように屈曲部 322が 設けられることが好ましい。また、屈曲部の形状は、ランプの配置位置および平行溝 に対して反射率の高い部材の配置方向を固定することができ、かつ、平行溝への配 置を妨げな 、形状であればどのような形状でも良 、。  [0047] Further, when a one-aperture type lamp is used, it is preferable to provide a positioning means in at least one place. As the positioning means, for example, as shown in FIG. 32B, a bent portion 322 is provided in the terminal portion of the lamp, a groove 326 is formed in the support member 324 for supporting the lamp, and the bent portion 322 is formed in the groove 326 of the support member 324. There is a method of fixing the lamp by inserting the lamp. Further, the angle of the bent portion 322 provided in the terminal portion of the lamp may be any angle as long as it can be specified with respect to the parallel groove of the light guide plate. It is preferable that the bent portion 322 is provided so that the light emission region 320 of one type of lamp is bisected. In addition, the shape of the bent portion can be any shape that can fix the position of the lamp and the direction of arrangement of the member having high reflectivity with respect to the parallel groove and does not hinder the arrangement in the parallel groove. Any shape is acceptable.
このように、位置決め手段を設けることで、光源の開口部中心と、導光板の平行溝 の中心との位置あわせを容易に行うことができ、導光板に効率よく光を入射させること ができる。  Thus, by providing the positioning means, the center of the opening of the light source can be easily aligned with the center of the parallel groove of the light guide plate, and light can be efficiently incident on the light guide plate.
[0048] また、本発明においては、図 33に示すように、導光板 18の平行溝 18fに光源を配 置させたときに、光源 12と導光板 18に形成された平行溝 18fとが直接接触しないよう に、導光板 18の平行溝 18fに部分的にリブ 330などを設けて、光源 12を導光板 18f の平行溝 18内に配置してもよい。  Further, in the present invention, as shown in FIG. 33, when the light source is arranged in the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18, the light source 12 and the parallel groove 18f formed in the light guide plate 18 are directly connected. The light source 12 may be disposed in the parallel groove 18 of the light guide plate 18f by partially providing a rib 330 or the like in the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18 so as not to make contact.
このような構成を採用することにより、光源 12で発生する熱が導光板 18へ直接伝わ ることが抑制され、導光板 18の過度の温度上昇が抑えられ、かつ光源である冷陰極 管が部分的に冷却されることが回避される。このようなリブ 330は、例えば、幅 lmm 以下であり、かつ高さ 0. 5mm程度の凸状の形状とすることができ、導光板の平行溝 18fの中心線方向に部分的に設けることが好ま 、。 By adopting such a configuration, the heat generated in the light source 12 is suppressed from being directly transmitted to the light guide plate 18, an excessive rise in the temperature of the light guide plate 18 is suppressed, and the cold-cathode tube as the light source is partially Cooling can be avoided. Such a rib 330 may have, for example, a convex shape with a width of lmm or less and a height of about 0.5 mm, and may be formed in a parallel groove of the light guide plate. It is preferable to provide a part in the direction of the center line of 18f.
また、導光板 18の平行溝の中心線方向の延長線上に相当するバックライトュ-ット の側面に開口部を設けて、その開口部を通じて光源 12を交換してもよい。そうするこ とにより、光源 12の寿命や故障の際における光源の交換を容易にするとともに、光源 12を交換するためにガイド部材を別途設けることを必要としない構成にすることがで きる。  Further, an opening may be provided on the side surface of the backlight unit corresponding to an extension of the parallel groove of the light guide plate 18 in the center line direction, and the light source 12 may be exchanged through the opening. By doing so, the life of the light source 12 or the replacement of the light source in the event of a failure can be facilitated, and a configuration that does not require a separate guide member to replace the light source 12 can be achieved.
[0049] 反射シート 22に対する光源 12の位置を規制するために、反射シート 22を剛性のあ る金属材料もしくは榭脂材料で形成し、反射シート 22と、光源 12を含む導光板 18と を一体ィ匕した構成とすることが好ましい。その際には、図 34A〜図 34Dに示すように 導光板 18と反射シート 22のうち、一方に凹部を設け他方に凸部を設けて嵌合したり 、あるいは、ねじにより固定したりして、導光板 18と反射シート 22を一体化して構成し てもよい。  [0049] In order to regulate the position of the light source 12 with respect to the reflection sheet 22, the reflection sheet 22 is formed of a rigid metal material or a resin material, and the reflection sheet 22 and the light guide plate 18 including the light source 12 are integrated. It is preferable to adopt a sloping configuration. In this case, as shown in FIGS. 34A to 34D, one of the light guide plate 18 and the reflection sheet 22 is provided with a concave portion and the other is provided with a convex portion, and is fitted or fixed with screws. Alternatively, the light guide plate 18 and the reflection sheet 22 may be integrally formed.
[0050] ノ ックライトユニットの薄型化に対して十分な剛性を確保するために、反射シート 22 を金属材料で形成した場合に、金属材料と冷陰極管との組み合わせによっては浮遊 容量が発生することが知られている。これに対して冷陰極管に対抗する反射シートの 部分に細長い穴部を設けることで浮遊容量の軽減を図ることができる。  When the reflection sheet 22 is formed of a metal material in order to secure sufficient rigidity with respect to the thinning of the knock light unit, a floating capacitance occurs depending on the combination of the metal material and the cold cathode tube. It is known. On the other hand, stray capacitance can be reduced by providing an elongated hole in the portion of the reflection sheet that faces the cold cathode tube.
[0051] 図 2A〜図 2Cにおいて、拡散シート 14は、導光板 18の光射出面 18aから出射する 光を拡散して均一化するためのものであり、例えば、 PET (ポリエチレンテレフタレー ト)、 PP (ポリプロピレン)、 PC (ポリカーボネート)、 PMMA (ポリメチノレメタタリレート) 、ベンジルメタタリレートや MS榭脂、その他のアクリル系榭脂、あるいは COP (シクロ ォレフィンポリマー)のような光学的に透明な榭脂からなる平板状部材に光拡散性を 付与して形成される。その方法は特に限定されないが、例えば、上記平板状部材の 表面に微細凹凸加工や研磨による表面粗化 (以降これらを施した面を「砂擦り面」と いう。)を施して拡散性を付与したり、表面に光を散乱させるシリカ、酸化チタン、酸ィ匕 亜鉛等の顔料もしくは榭脂ゃガラス、ジルコユア等のビーズ類をバインダとともに塗工 したり、上記の榭脂中に光を散乱させる前述の顔料、ビーズ類を混練することで形成 される。本発明において、拡散シート 14としては、マットタイプやコーティングタイプの 拡散シートを用いることができる。 本発明において、拡散シート 14としては、上記の素材を用い、かつ、光拡散性を付 与した厚み 500 μ m以下のフィルム状部材を用いることも好まし 、。 In FIG. 2A to FIG. 2C, the diffusion sheet 14 is for diffusing the light emitted from the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 to make it uniform, for example, PET (polyethylene terephthalate), Optically transparent, such as PP (polypropylene), PC (polycarbonate), PMMA (polymethinolemethacrylate), benzyl methacrylate, MS resin, other acrylic resins, or COP (cycloolefin polymer) It is formed by giving light diffusivity to a flat member made of a resin. Although the method is not particularly limited, for example, the surface of the above-mentioned plate-shaped member is subjected to surface roughening by fine irregularity processing or polishing (hereinafter, the surface subjected to these treatments is referred to as “sand rubbing surface”) to impart diffusivity. Or a pigment such as silica, titanium oxide, zinc oxide or the like, or beads such as resin glass, zirconia, etc., which scatter light on the surface, is coated with a binder, or light is scattered in the resin described above. It is formed by kneading the aforementioned pigments and beads. In the present invention, as the diffusion sheet 14, a diffusion sheet of a mat type or a coating type can be used. In the present invention, as the diffusion sheet 14, it is also preferable to use a film-like member having a thickness of 500 μm or less, which is made of the above-mentioned material and has light diffusing properties.
[0052] 拡散シート 14は、導光板 18の光射出面 18aから所定の距離だけ離して配置される ことが好ましぐその距離は導光板 18の光射出面 18aからの光量分布に応じて適宜 変更し得る。このように拡散シート 14を導光板 18の光射出面 18aから所定の間隔だ け離すことにより、導光板 18の光射出面 18aから射出する光力 光射出面 18aと拡 散シート 14の間でさらにミキシング (混合)される。これにより、拡散シート 14を透過し て液晶表示パネル 4を照明する光の照度を、より一層均一化することができる。拡散 シート 14を導光板 18の光射出面 18aから所定の間隔だけ離す方法としては、例え ば、拡散シート 14と導光板 18との間にスぺーサを設ける方法を用いることができる。  The diffusion sheet 14 is preferably disposed at a predetermined distance from the light exit surface 18 a of the light guide plate 18, and the distance is appropriately determined according to the light amount distribution from the light exit surface 18 a of the light guide plate 18. Can change. By separating the diffusion sheet 14 from the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 by a predetermined distance in this way, the light force emitted from the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 can be changed between the light exit surface 18a and the diffusion sheet 14. Further mixing (mixing). Thereby, the illuminance of the light passing through the diffusion sheet 14 and illuminating the liquid crystal display panel 4 can be made more uniform. As a method of separating the diffusion sheet 14 from the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 by a predetermined distance, for example, a method of providing a spacer between the diffusion sheet 14 and the light guide plate 18 can be used.
[0053] 特に、ノ ックライトユニット 2の厚みを少し厚くしてもよい場合には、導光板 18の平行 溝 18fの断面形状によって、平行溝 18fに相当する導光板 18の光射出面 18aにおけ る照度のピーク値を十分に低減する必要はなぐ部分的に低減するとともに拡散シー ト 14と導光板 18の光射出面 18aとの間に間隙を設けて、拡散シート 14から射出され る照明光を照度分布を均一にしても良い。また、導光板 18の平行溝 18fの断面形状 の改良(平行溝の先端部分の先細化)に限界があり、平行溝 18fに相当する導光板 1 8の光射出面 18aにおける照度のピーク値を完全に低減できない場合や十分に低減 できない場合にも、拡散シート 14と導光板 18の光射出面 18aとの間に間隙を設けて 、拡散シート 14から射出される照明光の照度分布を均一にしても良い。  [0053] In particular, when the thickness of the knock light unit 2 may be slightly increased, the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 corresponding to the parallel groove 18f may be formed depending on the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18. It is not necessary to sufficiently reduce the peak value of the illuminance, and the light emitted from the diffusion sheet 14 is provided by providing a gap between the diffusion sheet 14 and the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18. The light may have a uniform illuminance distribution. In addition, there is a limit to the improvement of the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18 (the tapering of the tip of the parallel groove), and the peak value of the illuminance at the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 corresponding to the parallel groove 18f is limited. Even if the reduction cannot be achieved completely or cannot be sufficiently reduced, a gap is provided between the diffusion sheet 14 and the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 to make the illuminance distribution of the illumination light emitted from the diffusion sheet 14 uniform. May be.
[0054] プリズムシート 16および 17は、複数のプリズムを平行に配列させることにより形成さ れた透明なシートであり、導光板 18の光射出面 18aから出射する光の集光性を高め て輝度を改善することができる。プリズムシート 16および 17の一方は、そのプリズム 列の延在する方向が導光板 18の平行溝 18fと平行になるように配置され、他方は垂 直になるように配置されている。すなわち、プリズムシート 16および 17は、プリズム列 の延在する方向が互いに垂直になるように配置されている。また、プリズムシート 16 は、プリズムの頂角が導光板 18の光射出面 18aと対向するように配置される。ここで 、プリズムシート 16および 17の配置順序は、導光板の直上に、導光板の平行溝と平 行な方向に延在するプリズムを有するプリズムシート 16を配置し、そのプリズムシート 16の上に、導光板 18の平行溝 18fと垂直な方向に延在するプリズムを有するプリズ ムシートを配置しても良ぐまた、その逆でも良い。 The prism sheets 16 and 17 are transparent sheets formed by arranging a plurality of prisms in parallel. The prism sheets 16 and 17 increase the light condensing property of light emitted from the light exit surface 18 a of the light guide plate 18 and increase the brightness. Can be improved. One of the prism sheets 16 and 17 is arranged so that the direction in which the prism rows extend is parallel to the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18, and the other is arranged so as to be vertical. That is, the prism sheets 16 and 17 are arranged so that the directions in which the prism rows extend are perpendicular to each other. The prism sheet 16 is disposed such that the apex angle of the prism faces the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18. Here, the arrangement order of the prism sheets 16 and 17 is such that a prism sheet 16 having a prism extending in a direction parallel to the parallel groove of the light guide plate is arranged immediately above the light guide plate, and the prism sheet is arranged. A prism sheet having a prism extending in a direction perpendicular to the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18 may be arranged on the light guide plate 16, or vice versa.
[0055] また、図示例では、プリズムシートを用いたが、プリズムシートの代わりに、プリズム に類する光学素子が規則的に配置されたシートを用いても良い。また、レンズ効果を 有する素子、例えば、レンチキュラーレンズ、凹レンズ、凸レンズ、ピラミッド型などの 光学素子を規則的に備えるシートをプリズムシートの代わりに用いることもできる。  In the illustrated example, a prism sheet is used, but a sheet in which optical elements similar to prisms are regularly arranged may be used instead of the prism sheet. In addition, a sheet regularly provided with an element having a lens effect, for example, an optical element such as a lenticular lens, a concave lens, a convex lens, or a pyramid type can be used instead of the prism sheet.
[0056] 本発明においては、さらに、図 3Aおよび図 3Bに示すように、反射シート 22と導光 板 18の光射出面 18aと反対側の傾斜面 18dとの間にもプリズムシート 19を設けること が好ましい。図 3Aは、反射シート 22と導光板 18の傾斜面 18dとの間にプリズムシー ト 19が配置されている様子を示す概略断面図であり、図 3Bは、反射シート 22と導光 板 18の傾斜面 18dとの間に配置されているプリズムシート 19を導光板側力 見た概 略平面図および概略横断面図である。反射シート 22と導光板 18の傾斜面 18dとの 間に設けられるプリズムシート 19は、プリズム 19aの延在する方向が導光板 18の平 行溝 18fと垂直になるように配置されるとともに、プリズム 19aの頂角が導光板 18の傾 斜面 18dと対向するように配置することが好ま 、。  In the present invention, as shown in FIGS. 3A and 3B, a prism sheet 19 is further provided between the reflection sheet 22 and the inclined surface 18d of the light guide plate 18 opposite to the light exit surface 18a. It is preferred that FIG. 3A is a schematic cross-sectional view showing a state in which a prism sheet 19 is arranged between the reflection sheet 22 and the inclined surface 18d of the light guide plate 18, and FIG. 3B is a sectional view of the reflection sheet 22 and the light guide plate 18. FIG. 9 is a schematic plan view and a schematic cross-sectional view of the prism sheet 19 disposed between the inclined surface 18d and the light guide plate when viewed from the side of the light guide plate. The prism sheet 19 provided between the reflection sheet 22 and the inclined surface 18d of the light guide plate 18 is arranged so that the direction in which the prism 19a extends is perpendicular to the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18, and It is preferable that the apex angle of 19a is arranged so as to face the inclined surface 18d of the light guide plate 18.
[0057] ここではプリズムシートを用いた力 プリズムシートと同様の効果を有する光学素子 を用いても良ぐレンズ効果を有する光学素子、例えば、レンチキュラーレンズ、凹レ ンズ、凸レンズ、ピラミッド型などの光学素子が規則的に配置されたシートを設けても 良い。  Here, a force using a prism sheet An optical element having a lens effect that can be obtained by using an optical element having the same effect as the prism sheet, for example, an optical element such as a lenticular lens, a concave lens, a convex lens, or a pyramid type A sheet in which elements are regularly arranged may be provided.
なお、図示例においては、プリズムシート 16および 17、さらに好ましくはプリズムシ ート 19を用いているが、導光板 18の平行溝 18fによる光射出面 18aにおける照度が より均一化されている場合には、プリズムシート 19はもちろん不要であるし、プリズム シート 16および 17のどちらか一方、または両方を用いなくても良い。高価なプリズム シートの使用枚数を減らし、あるいは、プリズムシートの使用をやめることにより、装置 コストを低減させることができる。  In the illustrated example, the prism sheets 16 and 17, and more preferably the prism sheet 19, are used.However, when the illuminance on the light exit surface 18a by the parallel grooves 18f of the light guide plate 18 is more uniform, Of course, the prism sheet 19 is unnecessary, and one or both of the prism sheets 16 and 17 need not be used. The apparatus cost can be reduced by reducing the number of expensive prism sheets used or by omitting the use of prism sheets.
[0058] 図 2A〜図 2Cにおいて、反射シート 22は、導光板 18の背面(図中、下面)から漏洩 する光を反射して、再び導光板 18に入射させるためのものであり、光の利用効率を 向上させることができる。反射シート 22は、導光板 18の下面 (傾斜面)を覆うように形 成される。リフレクタ 20は、導光板 18の平行溝 18fを塞ぐように光源 12の背後に設け られる。リフレクタ 20は、光源 12の下面力も光を反射して、導光板 18の平行溝 18fの 側壁面力も光を入射させることができる。 2A to 2C, the reflection sheet 22 reflects light leaking from the rear surface (the lower surface in the figure) of the light guide plate 18 and makes the light enter the light guide plate 18 again. Usage efficiency can be improved. The reflection sheet 22 is formed so as to cover the lower surface (inclined surface) of the light guide plate 18. Made. The reflector 20 is provided behind the light source 12 so as to close the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18. The reflector 20 reflects the light of the lower surface of the light source 12 as well as the light of the side wall surface of the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18.
[0059] 反射シート 22は、導光板 18の背面(図中、下面)から漏洩する光を反射することが できるのであれば、どのような材料で形成されてもよぐ例えば、 PETや PP (ポリプロ ピレン)等にフィラーを混練後延伸することによりボイドを形成して反射率を高めた榭 脂シート、透明もしくは上記のような白色の榭脂シート表面にアルミ蒸着などで鏡面 を形成したシート、アルミ等の金属箔もしくは金属箔を担持した榭脂シート、あるいは 表面に十分な反射性を有する金属薄板により形成することができる。また、リフレクタ 20は、例えば、上記反射シートと同じ素材、すなわち、表面に十分な反射性を付与 した榭脂素材、金属箔もしくは金属板により形成することができる。  [0059] The reflection sheet 22 may be made of any material as long as it can reflect light leaking from the back surface (the lower surface in the figure) of the light guide plate 18, for example, PET or PP ( A resin sheet in which the reflectance is increased by forming voids by kneading a filler into (polypropylene) or the like, and a sheet in which a mirror surface is formed on the surface of a transparent or white resin sheet by aluminum evaporation or the like as described above; It can be formed of a metal foil of aluminum or the like, a resin sheet carrying the metal foil, or a metal thin plate having a sufficiently reflective surface. Further, the reflector 20 can be formed of, for example, the same material as the above-mentioned reflection sheet, that is, a resin material, a metal foil or a metal plate having a surface with sufficient reflectivity.
[0060] また、反射シートを、導光板の光射出面と対向する側の面の平行溝を除いた部分、 例えば傾斜面に直接貼り付けても良い。また、反射シートを導光板に直接貼り付ける ことに限定されず、反射シートと同等の機能を有する塗料を導光板に直接塗布しても 良い。  [0060] Further, the reflection sheet may be directly attached to a portion of the light guide plate opposite to the light exit surface except for the parallel groove, for example, an inclined surface. Further, the present invention is not limited to directly applying the reflection sheet to the light guide plate, and a paint having the same function as the reflection sheet may be directly applied to the light guide plate.
このように、反射シートを直接貼り付ける、または、塗料を直接塗布することで、出射 効率を向上させることができ、また、反射シートの取り付け誤差による、輝度むらの発 生を防止できる。  As described above, by directly attaching the reflection sheet or directly applying the paint, the emission efficiency can be improved, and the occurrence of luminance unevenness due to a mounting error of the reflection sheet can be prevented.
[0061] また、本発明におけるバックライトユニットは、図 2Aおよび図 2Bに示した構成に限 定されず、例えば、導光板 18から出射される光の輝度を向上させるために、反射型 偏光フィルム、コレスティック型偏光フィルム、散乱型偏光フィルムなどの輝度向上シ ートを設けることもできる。このような輝度向上シートは、図 2Aおよび図 2Bにおいて、 導光板 18と液晶表示パネル 4 (下面偏光板)の間に配置することが好ましぐ特に、 液晶表示パネル 4 (下面偏光板)の光入射側の面に配置することが好ま 、。  The backlight unit in the present invention is not limited to the configuration shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B. For example, in order to improve the brightness of light emitted from light guide plate 18, a reflective polarizing film In addition, a brightness enhancement sheet such as a cholesteric polarizing film or a scattering polarizing film may be provided. In FIG. 2A and FIG. 2B, such a brightness enhancement sheet is preferably disposed between the light guide plate 18 and the liquid crystal display panel 4 (lower polarizer), particularly, for the liquid crystal display panel 4 (lower polarizer). It is preferable to dispose it on the surface on the light incident side.
[0062] また、本発明においては、視野角を広げるための光学補償フィルムを設けることも できる。光学補償フィルムとしては、例えば、ディスコティック液晶ゃネマティック液晶 を用いた光学補償フィルムや、コリメートフィルムを用いた光学補償フィルムなどを用 いることができる。光学補償フィルムは、図 2Aおよび図 2Bにおいて、液晶表示パネ ル 4の上面や下面に貼り付けられて設けられることが好ましい。 [0062] Further, in the present invention, an optical compensation film for widening the viewing angle may be provided. As the optical compensation film, for example, an optical compensation film using a discotic liquid crystal / nematic liquid crystal, an optical compensation film using a collimating film, or the like can be used. The optical compensation film is shown in FIGS. 2A and 2B. It is preferable to be provided by being attached to the upper surface or the lower surface of the nozzle 4.
[0063] また、拡散、集光、散乱または回折等の機能を有する光学部材を、図 2Aおよび図 2Bにおける導光板 18の光射出側、例えば、導光板 18の光射出面や、導光板 18と 液晶表示パネル 4との間に配置することもできる。このような光学部品として、上記い ずれか一つの機能を有する光学部品を一つだけ配置してもよいし、機能が同一また は異なる複数の光学部材を組み合わせて配置してもよ 、。複数の光学部品を組み 合わせて用いる場合は、それらの複数の光学部品の配置の順序は任意であり、所望 する光学特性に応じて、適宜、配置の順序を調整することができる。 In addition, an optical member having a function such as diffusion, light collection, scattering, or diffraction is connected to the light exit side of the light guide plate 18 in FIGS. 2A and 2B, for example, the light exit surface of the light guide plate 18 or the light guide plate 18. And the liquid crystal display panel 4. As such an optical component, only one optical component having any one of the above functions may be arranged, or a plurality of optical members having the same or different functions may be arranged in combination. When a plurality of optical components are used in combination, the order of arrangement of the plurality of optical components is arbitrary, and the order of arrangement can be appropriately adjusted according to desired optical characteristics.
[0064] 上述した拡散フィルム、プリズムシート、輝度向上シートなどの光学部材は、それぞ れ、 1つずつ用いてもよいし、複数用いてもよい。また、このような光学部材は互いに 貼り合わせて用いることもできる。また、導光板に直接貼り付けることもできるし、液晶 表示パネルの光入射側の面に貼り付けることもできる。また、プリズムシートの配置も 特に限定されず、例えば、光出射方向を上向きとしたときに、プリズムが上向きに配 置されて!、ても下向きに配置されて 、てもよく、 2枚のプリズムシートを重ねて用いる ことちでさる。 [0064] Each of the above-described optical members such as the diffusion film, the prism sheet, and the brightness enhancement sheet may be used one by one or a plurality of them. Further, such optical members can be used by being bonded to each other. Further, it can be attached directly to the light guide plate, or it can be attached to the light incident side surface of the liquid crystal display panel. Further, the arrangement of the prism sheet is not particularly limited. For example, when the light emission direction is upward, the prism may be disposed upward !, or may be disposed downward, and two prisms may be disposed. It is used to stack sheets.
[0065] また、図 2Aおよび図 2Bにおいて、導光板 18と液晶表示パネル 4との間には、上述 したように、拡散シート 14、プリズムシート 16、 17などの光学部品を配置した力 これ ら光学部品の構成は、このような構成例に限定されず、例えば、以下に示すような構 成にすることができる。例えば、導光板の光射出面側に、輝線の発生を抑制するため の網点が印刷により形成された拡散シートと、プリズムシートと、上述した輝度向上シ 一トとを順に配置させた構成にすることができる。この場合、拡散シートの光入射側の 面、すなわち、導光板の光射出面に対向する面に、網点が形成されていることが好ま しぐプリズムシートは光出射側にプリズム列が配置されていることが好ましい。  In FIGS. 2A and 2B, between the light guide plate 18 and the liquid crystal display panel 4, as described above, the optical components such as the diffusion sheet 14 and the prism sheets 16 and 17 are arranged. The configuration of the optical component is not limited to such a configuration example, and may be, for example, a configuration as described below. For example, on a light exit surface side of a light guide plate, a diffusion sheet in which halftone dots for suppressing generation of bright lines are formed by printing, a prism sheet, and the above-described brightness improvement sheet are sequentially arranged. can do. In this case, it is preferable that halftone dots are formed on the light incident side surface of the diffusion sheet, that is, the surface facing the light exit surface of the light guide plate, and the prism row is arranged on the light exit side in the prism sheet. Is preferred.
また、別の構成例として、導光板の光射出面側に、網点が印刷により形成された拡 散シートと、輝度向上シートとを配置させた構成にすることもできる。この場合、上記と 同様に、拡散シートの光入射側の面に網点が形成されていることが好ましい。また、 さらに別の構成例として、導光板の光射出面に網点を印刷により形成し、この導光板 の光射出面側に拡散シートおよび輝度向上シートを、この順で配置させた構成にす ることもできる。この場合は、導光板の光射出面に網点を形成しているので、網点の 形成されて 、な 、拡散シートが用いられる。 Further, as another configuration example, a configuration can be adopted in which a diffusion sheet in which halftone dots are formed by printing and a brightness enhancement sheet are arranged on the light exit surface side of the light guide plate. In this case, it is preferable that a halftone dot is formed on the light incident side surface of the diffusion sheet as described above. Further, as another configuration example, a halftone dot is formed by printing on the light exit surface of the light guide plate, and a diffusion sheet and a brightness enhancement sheet are arranged in this order on the light exit surface side of the light guide plate. You can also. In this case, since halftone dots are formed on the light exit surface of the light guide plate, halftone dots are formed, and a diffusion sheet is used.
また、さらには、導光板の光射出面に網点を印刷により形成し、この導光板の光射 出面側に、同一または異なる特性を有する 2枚の拡散シートと、 1枚の輝度向上シー トとを順に配置させた構成にすることも可能である。また、導光板の光射出面側に、 2 枚の拡散シートと、 1枚の輝度向上シートを順に配置させた構成にしてもよい。この場 合は、導光板の光射出面に網点を形成せずに、導光板に近い側に位置する拡散シ ートの、導光板の光射出面に対向する面に、網点を印刷により形成することが好まし い。  Further, halftone dots are formed on the light exit surface of the light guide plate by printing, and two diffusion sheets having the same or different characteristics and one brightness enhancement sheet are provided on the light exit surface side of the light guide plate. May be arranged in order. Further, a configuration may be adopted in which two diffusion sheets and one brightness enhancement sheet are sequentially arranged on the light exit surface side of the light guide plate. In this case, halftone dots are not printed on the light exit surface of the light guide plate, but are printed on the surface of the diffusion sheet located closer to the light guide plate, facing the light exit surface of the light guide plate. It is preferable to form by.
上記構成例において、部品点数が少なぐ製造コストを低くできるという観点からす ると、導光板の光射出面に網点を印刷により形成し、この導光板の光射出面側に拡 散シートおよび輝度向上シートを、この順で配置させた構成が好ま 、。  In the above configuration example, from the viewpoint that the number of parts is small and the manufacturing cost can be reduced, halftone dots are formed on the light exit surface of the light guide plate by printing, and a diffusion sheet and a diffusion sheet are provided on the light exit surface side of the light guide plate. A configuration in which the brightness enhancement sheets are arranged in this order is preferable.
[0066] ここで、本発明の導光板 18の構造についてさらに詳細に説明する。  Here, the structure of the light guide plate 18 of the present invention will be described in more detail.
図 2Bに示すように、導光板 18は、矩形状の光射出面 18aと、その一辺に平行な一 対の厚肉部 18bと、この厚肉部 18bの両側に前記一辺に平行に形成される薄肉端 部 18cと、厚肉部 18bから前記一辺に直交する方向に両側の薄肉端部 18cに向かつ て肉厚が薄くなり、傾斜面 18dを形成する傾斜背面部 18eと、厚肉部 18bに前記一 辺に平行に形成される、光源 12を収納するための平行溝 18fとを有する。すなわち、 導光板 18は、表面の外形形状が矩形状の板状部材であり、透明榭脂により形成され ている。導光板 18の光射出面 18aは平坦であり、その反対側の面が、一方の辺に向 力 にしたがって板厚が薄くなるように、光射出面 18aに対して傾斜して 、る。  As shown in FIG.2B, the light guide plate 18 is formed with a rectangular light exit surface 18a, a pair of thick portions 18b parallel to one side thereof, and on both sides of the thick portions 18b parallel to the one side. A thin end portion 18c, a slanted back portion 18e that becomes thinner from the thick portion 18b toward the thin end portions 18c on both sides in a direction orthogonal to the one side and forms an inclined surface 18d, and a thick portion. 18b has a parallel groove 18f formed in parallel with the one side and for accommodating the light source 12. That is, the light guide plate 18 is a plate-like member having a rectangular outer shape on the surface, and is formed of transparent resin. The light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 is flat, and the surface on the opposite side is inclined with respect to the light exit surface 18a so that the thickness of the light guide plate 18 becomes smaller in accordance with the direction of one side.
[0067] また、本発明の導光板においては、図 2Cに示すように、光射出面 18aに対して垂 直で光源 12の中心軸 Oを含む面 Xから薄肉部の端面 18hまでの距離を L [mm]とし 、平行溝に線状光源を配置し、線状光源から入射された光を出射面から射出する際 の出射面の全光束量を I 、光源表面の全光束量を I としたときに、 Lは下記式の  Further, in the light guide plate of the present invention, as shown in FIG. 2C, the distance from the surface X perpendicular to the light exit surface 18a and including the central axis O of the light source 12 to the end surface 18h of the thin portion is determined. L [mm], a linear light source is arranged in the parallel groove, and the total luminous flux on the light exit surface when light incident from the linear light source exits from the light exit surface is I, and the total luminous flux on the light source surface is I Then, L is
BLU CFL  BLU CFL
範囲内であるように形成される事が好ましい。  Preferably, it is formed to be within the range.
L=k2 X (I /\ )  L = k2 X (I / \)
CFL BLU  CFL BLU
[0068] 出射効率を表す I /\ の下限値は PCモニターや液晶 TVに必要とされる平均 輝度、また上限値は導光板界面でのフレネル損失や導光板の透過率、反射フィルム の反射率の観点から、 [0068] The lower limit value of I / \, which indicates the emission efficiency, is the average value required for PC monitors and LCD TVs. The brightness and the upper limit are determined from the viewpoint of Fresnel loss at the light guide plate interface, transmittance of the light guide plate, and reflectivity of the reflective film.
0. 3≤1 /\ ≤0. 9であることが好ましぐ液晶 TVや屋外で使用するモニター 0.3 ≤ 1 / \ ≤ 0.9 Preferred LCD LCD or outdoor monitor
BLU CFL BLU CFL
は、高い平均輝度が要求されるため、 0. 6≤1 /\ ≤0. 8である事が好ましい。  Since high average luminance is required, it is preferable that the ratio is 0.6≤1 / \ ≤0.8.
BLU CFL  BLU CFL
また、 k2は導光路形状を表すパラメータであり、 PCモニターや液晶緒 TVに必要とさ れる平均輝度の観点から、 1≤1^2≤160とすることカ 子ましく、 9≤k2≤40である事 力 り好ましい。  K2 is a parameter that represents the shape of the light guide path.From the viewpoint of the average luminance required for PC monitors and liquid crystal TVs, k2 should be 1≤1 ^ 2≤160, and 9≤k2≤40. Is preferable.
この様にして求められた Lで導光板を形成する事で所望の光束量を得る事ができる  A desired light flux can be obtained by forming the light guide plate with the L obtained in this manner.
[0069] 本発明においては、導光板 18の傾斜面 18dは、図 2Cに示すように、光射出面 18a に対する傾斜角度 Φ 1と両最端部 18hの間の距離 Wとの関係力 1 [rad] XW[m m]≤200 (mm) ( Φ 1 [° ] XW[mm]≤11459 (mm) )を満足するよう構成される。 このような範囲の角度を有する導光板 18を、図 1に示すように、薄肉端部 18cの端面 部 18hが互いに密接するように複数接続して、大きな光射出面を有する導光体を構 成すれば、平行溝 18fの光入射部 18gから入射した冷陰極管 12の光は導光板 18の 内部において傾斜面 18dで反射した後、光射出面 18aから出射するとともに、連結部 における輝度ムラを低減することができる。上記傾斜角度 Φ 1は、冷陰極管からの出 射光が導光板 18の内部を一部全反射して連結部まで光を伝播させ、光入射部との 相対輝度の比を、 2倍以下とするためには、両最端部の距離 Wとの関係を満たし、例 えば、 W=300の場合では、 O (rad)≤ 1≤0. 35 (rad) (0° ≤Φ 1≤20° )が好まし く、 O (rad)≤ 1≤0. 175 (rad) (0° ≤Φ 1≤10° )を満足することが一層好ましい 。また、連結部に継ぎ目のない一体ィ匕された形状では、連結部付近においては連結 面の反射を防ぐため、上記傾斜角度 Φ 1と異なる傾斜角度を有するように形成される ことが好ましい。この異なる角度を Φ 2とした時、この傾斜角度 Φ 2は、連結部におけ る相対輝度の上昇を平均輝度比の 3倍以下好ましくは 2倍以下とするために、 Φ 1 > Φ 2の条件を満足することが好ましい。なお、連結部が図 4Αに示されるような曲面の 場合はその接線方向となす角度を Φ 2とする。 In the present invention, as shown in FIG. 2C, the inclined surface 18d of the light guide plate 18 has a relational force of 1 between the inclined angle Φ1 with respect to the light exit surface 18a and the distance W between the two extreme ends 18h. rad] XW [mm] ≤200 (mm) (Φ 1 [°] XW [mm] ≤11459 (mm)) As shown in FIG. 1, a plurality of light guide plates 18 having an angle in such a range are connected so that the end surfaces 18h of the thin end portions 18c are in close contact with each other to form a light guide having a large light exit surface. If formed, the light of the cold cathode tube 12 incident from the light incident portion 18g of the parallel groove 18f is reflected by the inclined surface 18d inside the light guide plate 18, then exits from the light exit surface 18a, and the brightness unevenness at the connection portion is obtained. Can be reduced. The angle of inclination Φ1 is such that the light emitted from the cold cathode tube partially reflects inside the light guide plate 18 and propagates the light to the connecting portion, and the ratio of the relative luminance to the light incident portion is less than twice. To satisfy the relationship with the distance W between both ends, for example, when W = 300, O (rad) ≤ 1 ≤ 0.35 (rad) (0 ° ≤ Φ 1 ≤ 20 ° ) Is preferable, and it is more preferable to satisfy O (rad) ≤ 1 ≤ 0.175 (rad) (0 ° ≤ Φ 1 ≤ 10 °). In addition, in the case where the connecting portion is integrally formed without a joint, it is preferable that the connecting portion is formed so as to have an inclination angle different from the above-mentioned inclination angle Φ1 in order to prevent reflection of the connection surface near the connection portion. When the different angle is Φ 2, the inclination angle Φ 2 is set to satisfy Φ 1> Φ 2 in order to increase the relative brightness at the connection portion to 3 times or less, preferably 2 times or less of the average brightness ratio. It is preferable to satisfy the conditions. When the connecting portion is a curved surface as shown in Fig. 4Α, the angle between the connecting portion and the tangential direction is Φ2.
[0070] ここでは、導光板 18の傾斜面 18dを平坦な面で構成した力 導光板 18を複数連結 したときに導光板同士が接続される傾斜面 18dの最端部近傍 (以下、傾斜端部という )の断面形状を、図 4Aおよび図 4Bにそれぞれ示すような曲線形状または多角形形 状にして、一方の導光板 18Aの傾斜面 18dが他方の導光板 18Bの傾斜面 18dと連 続的に接続されるようにすることが好ましい。例えば、図 4Aに示すように、傾斜面の 最端部の形状を曲線形状にする場合は、それぞれの導光板 18A、 Bの光射出面 18 aに対して反対側の面の連結部 120においては、光射出面 18aに対する傾斜角度が ゼロになるように構成し、連結部 120の近傍以外の傾斜面 18dは、上記傾斜角度の 範囲になるように構成することが好ましい。また、図 4Bに示すように、多角形状とする 場合は多角形が曲線を含んで構成しても良 ヽ。 Here, a plurality of light guide plates 18 in which the inclined surfaces 18d of the light guide plates 18 are formed as flat surfaces are connected. The cross-sectional shape near the extreme end (hereinafter, referred to as the inclined end) of the inclined surface 18d where the light guide plates are connected to each other when the light guide plates are connected to each other is formed into a curved shape or a polygonal shape as shown in FIGS.4A and 4B. It is preferable that the inclined surface 18d of one light guide plate 18A is continuously connected to the inclined surface 18d of the other light guide plate 18B. For example, as shown in FIG.4A, when the shape of the end portion of the inclined surface is curved, the connecting portion 120 on the surface opposite to the light exit surface 18a of each of the light guide plates 18A and B is used. Preferably, the inclination angle with respect to the light exit surface 18a is set to zero, and the inclination surface 18d other than the vicinity of the connecting portion 120 is preferably set so as to fall within the range of the inclination angle. Further, as shown in FIG. 4B, when a polygon is used, the polygon may include a curve.
[0071] また、図 4Bに示すように、傾斜面 18dの最端部の形状を多角形形状にする場合は 、それぞれの導光板 18Aおよび 18Bの光射出面 18aに対して反対側の面の連結部 120を、光射出面 18aに対する角度がゼロから次第に傾斜するような平面で構成し、 連結部 120以外の傾斜面 18dでは、上記傾斜角度の範囲になるように構成すること が好ましい。このとき、導光板 18Aおよび 18Bのそれぞれの傾斜面 18dの最端部近 傍の傾斜面によって形成される連結部 120における角度は、ゼロであっても良ぐ上 述した光射出面 18aに対する傾斜面の角度よりも緩やかな角度であればよい。このよ うな構成することにより、導光板 18を複数並列して構成したときに、それぞれの導光 板の光射出面の連結部 120における輝度の発生をより一層低減することができる。ま た、傾斜面 18dの最端部の形状を多角形形状にする場合は、図 4Bに示したように、 上記 Φ 2は、最端部と近接する傾斜面の角度である。  As shown in FIG. 4B, in the case where the shape of the end portion of the inclined surface 18d is polygonal, the shape of the surface opposite to the light exit surface 18a of each of the light guide plates 18A and 18B is used. It is preferable that the connecting portion 120 is formed of a plane whose angle with respect to the light exit surface 18a is gradually inclined from zero, and that the inclined surface 18d other than the connecting portion 120 is formed so as to be in the range of the above-mentioned inclined angle. At this time, the angle at the connecting portion 120 formed by the inclined surface near the extreme end of each of the inclined surfaces 18d of the light guide plates 18A and 18B may be zero. It is sufficient that the angle is gentler than the angle of the surface. With such a configuration, when a plurality of light guide plates 18 are arranged in parallel, it is possible to further reduce the occurrence of luminance at the connecting portion 120 of the light exit surface of each light guide plate. When the shape of the end portion of the inclined surface 18d is a polygonal shape, as shown in FIG. 4B, Φ 2 is the angle of the inclined surface close to the end portion.
[0072] ここで、本発明の導光板の光出射原理について図 5を参照しながら説明する。なお 、図 5においては、説明の便宜上、図 2Bに示したリフレクタ、反射板、プリズムシート などの部品は省略して 、る。  Here, the light emission principle of the light guide plate of the present invention will be described with reference to FIG. In FIG. 5, components such as the reflector, the reflector, and the prism sheet shown in FIG. 2B are omitted for convenience of description.
本発明においては、導光板 18の傾斜面 18dの傾斜角度 Φ 1と両最端部の距離 W との関係が、 1 [rad] XW [mm]≤ 200 [mm]を満足するように形成している。かか る導光板 18を複数並列してバックライトユニットを構成したときには、所定の導光板 1 8Aの平行溝 18fに設けられた冷陰極管 12から出射した光の一部は、その導光板 18 Aの内部の傾斜面 18dで反射した後、その導光板 18Aの端面部 18hに到達する。そ して、その端面部 18hと接続する隣の導光板 18Bの端面部 18hから、その導光板 18 Bの内部に入射し、隣に位置する導光板 18Bの光射出面 18aから出射する。 In the present invention, the relationship between the inclination angle Φ1 of the inclined surface 18d of the light guide plate 18 and the distance W between the two extreme ends satisfies 1 [ rad ] XW [mm] ≤ 200 [mm]. are doing. When the backlight unit is configured by arranging a plurality of such light guide plates 18 in parallel, a part of the light emitted from the cold cathode tubes 12 provided in the parallel grooves 18f of the predetermined light guide plate 18A is After being reflected by the inclined surface 18d inside A, the light reaches the end face 18h of the light guide plate 18A. So Then, the light enters the interior of the light guide plate 18B from the end surface 18h of the adjacent light guide plate 18B connected to the end surface 18h, and exits from the light exit surface 18a of the adjacent light guide plate 18B.
さらに連結部付近の傾斜角 Φ 2を変化させる事によって、隣接する導光板へ移動 する光量の調節が可能である。  Further, by changing the inclination angle Φ2 near the connecting portion, it is possible to adjust the amount of light moving to the adjacent light guide plate.
[0073] 本発明にお 、ては、このように導光板 18を複数連続して配置して、隣に位置する 導光板 18に配置された冷陰極管 12からの光をも利用することができるので、光の出 射効率を高めることができる。この一体化された繰返し単位の構造は、繰返し単位一 体ィ匕せずに連続させた場合の各端部における輝線強度の増大を抑制できるため、よ り均一な輝度を得られるという利点を有する。そして、さらには、互いに隣接する導光 板 18の光射出面 18aと反対側の端部における断面形状を、図 4Aおよび図 4Bに示 したように曲面形状または多角形形状とすることにより、連結部における輝度の発生 を一層抑制することができる。  [0073] In the present invention, a plurality of light guide plates 18 are continuously arranged in this way, and light from the cold cathode tubes 12 arranged on the adjacent light guide plate 18 can also be used. As a result, the light emission efficiency can be increased. The structure of the integrated repeating unit has an advantage that a more uniform luminance can be obtained because an increase in the intensity of the bright line at each end when the repeating unit is continued without being integrated. . Further, the cross-sectional shape of the light guide plate 18 adjacent to each other at the end opposite to the light exit surface 18a is formed into a curved shape or a polygonal shape as shown in FIG. 4A and FIG. The generation of luminance in the portion can be further suppressed.
[0074] つぎに、本発明の導光板を複数連結したときの光射出面における輝線の傾斜角依 存性についてシミュレーションにより調べた。まず、 3個の導光板を連結した場合につ いて調べた。図 6A〜図 6Eは、それぞれ、傾斜角が異なる場合の輝線のグラフを示 している。シミュレーションでは、図 2Bに示す導光板 18の厚肉部 18bの厚さを一定に 維持したまま、最端部 18iの厚さ Tを薄く変化させることによって、光射出面 18aにお ける輝度を計算した。また、冷陰極管 12の直径を 3mm、冷陰極管 12の軸に対して 垂直方向の導光板 18の幅を 30mm、厚肉部 18bの最大厚みを 5. 5mmとし、最端 咅 18iの厚さ Tを、 1. Omm、 1. 5mm、 2. Omm、 2. 5mm、 3. Ommに変ィ匕させた。 図 6A〜図 6Eに示したグラフは、それぞれ、最端部 18iの厚さ Tを、 1. Omm、 1. 5m m、 2. Omm, 2. 5mm, 3. Ommとした場合の光射出面における輝度のグラフである 。ここで、最端部 18iの厚さ T力 1. Omm、 1. 5mm、 2. Omm、 2. 5mm、 3. Omm の導光板は、図 2Cにおける傾斜面の傾斜角度 Φ 1が、約 0. 380[rad] (約 21. 8° ) 、約 0. 335 [rad] (約 19. 2° ;)、約 0. 290 [rad] (約 16. 6° ;)、約 0. 246 [rad] (約 1 4. 1° )、約 0. 204[rad] (約 11. 7° )の導光板に対応する。図 6A〜図 6Eに示した グラフにおいて、縦軸の輝度は、冷陰極管の輝度を 1ルーメンに換算して得られた値 を示し、横軸は、冷陰極管の軸に垂直な方向の距離であり、 3つの導光板のうちの中 央の導光板に設けられた冷陰極管の軸からの距離を示している。また、図 7には、傾 斜面の角度に応じて輝線が変化する様子、すなわち輝線の傾斜角依存性を分かり やすく示すために、図 6A〜図 6Eに示したそれぞれのグラフを 1つにまとめて示した。 Next, the dependency of the inclination angle of the bright line on the light exit surface when a plurality of the light guide plates of the present invention were connected was examined by simulation. First, we examined the case where three light guide plates were connected. 6A to 6E respectively show graphs of emission lines when the inclination angles are different. In the simulation, the brightness at the light exit surface 18a was calculated by changing the thickness T of the outermost portion 18i to a small value while maintaining the thickness of the thick portion 18b of the light guide plate 18 shown in FIG. 2B constant. did. The diameter of the cold cathode tube 12 is 3 mm, the width of the light guide plate 18 perpendicular to the axis of the cold cathode tube 12 is 30 mm, the maximum thickness of the thick portion 18b is 5.5 mm, and the thickness of T was changed to 1. Omm, 1.5 mm, 2. Omm, 2.5 mm, 3. Omm. The graphs shown in FIGS. 6A to 6E show the light emission surface when the thickness T of the outermost portion 18i is 1.Omm, 1.5 mm, 2.Omm, 2.5 mm, and 3.Omm, respectively. 6 is a graph of luminance at. Here, the light guide plate having a thickness T force of 1.Omm, 1.5mm, 2.Omm, 2.5mm, 3.Omm at the end 18i has an inclination angle Φ1 of the inclined surface of FIG. 380 [rad] (about 21.8 °), about 0.335 [rad] (about 19.2 °;), about 0.390 [rad] (about 16.6 °;), about 0.246 [ rad] (about 14.1 °) and about 0.204 [rad] (about 11.7 °). In the graphs shown in FIGS.6A to 6E, the luminance on the vertical axis represents a value obtained by converting the luminance of the cold cathode fluorescent lamp to 1 lumen, and the horizontal axis represents a value in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the cold cathode fluorescent lamp. The distance between the three light guide plates The distance from the axis of the cold cathode tube provided on the central light guide plate is shown. In addition, Fig. 7 summarizes the graphs shown in Figs. 6A to 6E into one to show how the emission line changes according to the angle of the inclined surface, that is, to clearly show the dependence of the emission line on the inclination angle. Shown.
[0075] 図 6A〜図 6Eのそれぞれのグラフに示すように、導光板の連結部において輝線が 発生していることが分かる。そして、図 7に示すように、この連結部における輝度は、 傾斜面の傾斜部の角度に応じて変化していることがわかる。特に、導光板の傾斜面 の傾斜角が緩やかになるにしたがって連結部における輝度が低くなつており、輝度 むらが低減されていることがわかる。両最端部の距離 300mmの場合、導光板の傾 斜面の傾斜角 Φ 1を 0. 349 [rad] (約 20° )以下とすることにより、両最端部の距離 Wとの関係が、 1 [rad] XW[mm]≤200 ( 1 [° ] XW[mm]≤11459 [mm])を 満たし、連結部における輝度が低減されることがわかる。 [0075] As shown in the graphs of Figs. 6A to 6E, it can be seen that bright lines are generated at the connection portions of the light guide plates. Then, as shown in FIG. 7, it can be seen that the luminance at the connection portion changes according to the angle of the inclined portion of the inclined surface. In particular, as the angle of inclination of the inclined surface of the light guide plate becomes gentler, the luminance at the connecting portion becomes lower, and it can be seen that the luminance unevenness is reduced. When the distance between the two extreme ends is 300 mm, by setting the inclination angle Φ 1 of the inclined surface of the light guide plate to 0.349 [rad] (about 20 °) or less, the relationship with the distance W between the extreme ends is It satisfies 1 [rad] XW [mm] ≤ 200 (1 [°] XW [mm] ≤ 11459 [mm]), and it can be seen that the brightness at the joint is reduced.
[0076] また、図 8A〜図 8Dには、連結部における光射出面に対する傾斜面の角度 Φ 2を 、 Φ 2は Φ 1Ζ2と設定して、連結部以外の傾斜面の角度 Φ 1よりも小さくした(Φ 2く Φ 1)導光板を 3個連結したときの輝度分布のグラフを示した。図 8A〜図 8Dは、それ ぞれ、導光板 18の最端部 18iの厚さ Tを、 1. Omm、 1. 5mm、 2. Omm、 2. 5mmと したときの結果である。また、図 9には、傾斜面の角度に応じて輝線が変化する様子 、すなわち、輝線の傾斜角依存性を分かりやすく示すために、図 8A〜図 8Dに示し たグラフを 1つにまとめて示した。この場合も、上記と同様に、導光板の連結部におい て輝線が発生しており、導光板の傾斜面の傾斜角が緩やかになるにしたがって、連 結部における輝度が低くなり、輝度むらが低減されていることがわかる。  8A to 8D, the angle Φ 2 of the inclined surface with respect to the light exit surface at the connecting portion is set to Φ 1, and Φ 2 is set to Φ 1Ζ2, so that the angle Φ 1 of the inclined surface other than the connecting portion is larger than Φ 1. A graph of the luminance distribution when three light guide plates of reduced size (Φ 2 Φ 1) are connected is shown. FIGS. 8A to 8D show the results when the thickness T of the outermost end 18i of the light guide plate 18 is set to 1.0 mm, 1.5 mm, 2.0 mm, and 2.5 mm, respectively. Also, FIG. 9 shows how the bright line changes according to the angle of the inclined surface, that is, the graphs shown in FIGS. 8A to 8D are combined into one in order to clearly show the inclination angle dependence of the bright line. Indicated. Also in this case, as in the above, a bright line is generated at the connection portion of the light guide plate, and as the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the light guide plate becomes gentler, the brightness at the connection portion becomes lower, and the brightness unevenness is reduced. It can be seen that it has been reduced.
この導光板を用いる事によって、冷陰極管 (CCFL)と導光板とを組み合わせの厚 みが 5mm以下で済み、バックライトユニット(BLU)としては 10mm以下の厚みにす ることができるため、同等の性能を有する直下型バックライトユニットの厚み 20〜30m mに対して、より薄型化が図ることが可能となる。  By using this light guide plate, the thickness of the combination of the cold cathode fluorescent lamp (CCFL) and the light guide plate can be 5 mm or less, and the thickness of the backlight unit (BLU) can be 10 mm or less. It is possible to reduce the thickness of the direct-type backlight unit, which has the above-mentioned performance, to a thickness of 20 to 30 mm.
[0077] また、図 10A〜図 10Eには、 6個の導光板を連結したときの光射出面における輝度 分布のグラフを示した。図 10A〜図 10Eは、それぞれ、導光板 18の最端部 18iの厚 さ Tを、 1. Omm、 1. 5mm、 2. Omm、 2. 5mm、 3. Ommとしたときの輝度分布であ る。また、図 11には、傾斜面の角度に応じて輝線が変化する様子、すなわち、輝線 の傾斜角依存性を分かりやすく示すために、図 10A〜図 10Eに示したグラフをまと めて示した。この場合も、上記と同様に、導光板の連結部において輝線が発生して おり、導光板の傾斜面の傾斜角が緩やかになるにしたがって、連結部における輝度 が低くなり、輝度むらが低減されていることがわかる。 [0077] Figs. 10A to 10E show graphs of the luminance distribution on the light exit surface when six light guide plates are connected. 10A to 10E show the luminance distribution when the thickness T of the outermost end 18i of the light guide plate 18 is 1.Omm, 1.5mm, 2.Omm, 2.5mm, and 3.Omm, respectively. You. FIG. 11 shows how the bright line changes in accordance with the angle of the inclined surface, that is, the bright line The graphs shown in FIGS. 10A to 10E are collectively shown in order to clearly show the inclination angle dependency of FIG. Also in this case, similarly to the above, the bright line is generated at the connecting portion of the light guide plate, and as the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the light guide plate becomes gentler, the brightness at the connecting portion becomes lower and the uneven brightness is reduced. You can see that it is.
[0078] また、図 12A〜図 12Cおよび図 13D、図 13Eには、 9個の導光板を連結したときの 光射出面における輝度分布のグラフを示した。図 12A〜図 12C、図 13D、図 13Eに 示したグラフは、それぞれ、導光板 18の最端部 18iの厚さ Tを、 1. Omm, 1. 5mm, 2. Omm、 2. 5mm、 3. Ommとしたときの結果である。また、図 14には、傾斜面の角 度に応じて輝線が変化する様子、すなわち、輝線の傾斜角依存性を分かりやすく示 すために、図 12A〜図 12C、図 13D、図 13Eに示したグラフをまとめて示した。この ように導光板を 9個連結した場合も、上記と同様に、導光板の連結部において輝線が 発生しており、導光板の傾斜面の傾斜角が緩やかになるにしたがって、連結部にお ける輝度が低くなり、輝度むらが低減されていることがわかる。  FIGS. 12A to 12C, 13D, and 13E show graphs of luminance distribution on the light exit surface when nine light guide plates are connected. The graphs shown in FIGS.12A to 12C, FIG.13D, and FIG.13E respectively show the thickness T of the outermost portion 18i of the light guide plate 18 as 1.Omm, 1.5mm, 2.Omm, 2.5mm, 3. This is the result when Omm is set. In addition, Fig. 14 shows how the bright line changes according to the angle of the inclined surface, that is, Fig. 12A to Fig. 12C, Fig. 13D, and Fig. The graphs are summarized below. Even in the case where nine light guide plates are connected in this way, similarly to the above, bright lines are generated at the connection portions of the light guide plates, and as the inclination angle of the inclined surface of the light guide plate becomes gentle, the connection portions are connected. It can be seen that the luminance of the image becomes lower, and the luminance unevenness is reduced.
[0079] ところで、図 2Aおよび図 2B力も分力るように、導光板 18の厚肉部 18bの光射出面 18aと反対側には、光源 12を収容するための平行溝 18fが長手方向に延在して形成 されている。平行溝 18fの深さは、光源 12の一部が導光板 18の下面からはみ出さな いように決定されることが好ましぐ光源 12の寸法や導光板 18の機械的強度、経時 変化を考慮して決定されることが好ましい。また導光板 18の厚肉部 18bや薄肉端部 18cの厚みは、光源 12の寸法に応じて任意に変更することができる。ここで、導光板 18の平行溝 18fは、導光板 18の長手方向に対して垂直な方向に形成してもよいが、 平行溝 18fに収容される光源 12からの光利用効率を高めるためには長手方向に形 成することが好ましい。  By the way, parallel grooves 18f for accommodating the light source 12 are provided in the longitudinal direction on the side opposite to the light exit surface 18a of the thick portion 18b of the light guide plate 18 so that the force shown in FIGS. It is formed to extend. The depth of the parallel groove 18f is determined so that a part of the light source 12 does not protrude from the lower surface of the light guide plate 18, and preferably the dimensions of the light source 12, the mechanical strength of the light guide plate 18, and the change with time. Preferably, it is determined in consideration of the above. The thickness of the thick portion 18b and the thin end portion 18c of the light guide plate 18 can be arbitrarily changed according to the dimensions of the light source 12. Here, the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18 may be formed in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the light guide plate 18, but in order to increase the efficiency of using light from the light source 12 housed in the parallel groove 18f. Is preferably formed in the longitudinal direction.
[0080] 図 2Bに示す構造を有する導光板 18において、その平行溝 18fに配置された光源 12から放射される光のうち、平行溝 18fを形成する側壁力ゝら導光板 18の内部に入射 した光は、導光板 18の傾斜面 18dで反射した後、光射出面 18aから出射する。このと き、導光板 18の下面力も一部の光が漏出するが、その漏洩した光は、導光板 18の 傾斜面 18b側に形成された反射シート 18により反射して再び導光板 18の内部に入 射して光射出面 18aから出射する。こうして、導光板 18の光射出面 18aから均一な光 が放射される。 In the light guide plate 18 having the structure shown in FIG. 2B, of the light emitted from the light source 12 disposed in the parallel groove 18f, the light enters the light guide plate 18 from the side wall force forming the parallel groove 18f. The reflected light is reflected from the inclined surface 18d of the light guide plate 18 and then exits from the light exit surface 18a. At this time, some light leaks from the lower surface force of the light guide plate 18, but the leaked light is reflected by the reflection sheet 18 formed on the inclined surface 18 b side of the light guide plate 18, and again inside the light guide plate 18. And exits from the light exit surface 18a. Thus, the uniform light is emitted from the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18. Is emitted.
[0081] 導光板 18は、例えば、加熱した原料榭脂を押し出し成形や射出成形によって成形 する方法、型中でモノマー、オリゴマー等を重合させて成形する注形重合法等を用 いて製造することができる。導光板 18の材料としては、例えば、ポリカーボネートや P MMA (ポリメチルメタタリレート)などのアクリル系榭脂、 PET (ポリエチレンテレフタレ 一ト)、 PP (ポリプロピレン)、 PC (ポリカーボネート)、 PMMA (ポリメチノレメタタリレート )、ベンジルメタタリレートや MS榭脂、その他のアクリル系榭脂、あるいは COP (シク 口才レフインポリマー)などの透明榭脂を用いることができる。透明樹脂には、光を散 乱させるための微粒子を混入させても良ぐこれにより光射出面 18aからの光の出射 効率を一層高めることができる。透明樹脂に光を散乱させるための微粒子を混入させ る場合は、その微粒子は等方性を有していてもよいし、異方性を有していてもよい。  The light guide plate 18 is manufactured by, for example, a method of molding a heated raw resin by extrusion molding or injection molding, or a casting polymerization method of polymerizing monomers, oligomers and the like in a mold and molding. Can be. Examples of the material of the light guide plate 18 include acrylic resins such as polycarbonate and PMMA (polymethylmethacrylate), PET (polyethylene terephthalate), PP (polypropylene), PC (polycarbonate), and PMMA (polymer It is possible to use transparent resins such as cinnamate methacrylate, benzyl metathallate, MS resin, other acrylic resins, or COP (Shikiguchi Refin Polymer). Fine particles for dispersing light may be mixed in the transparent resin. This makes it possible to further enhance the efficiency of light emission from the light exit surface 18a. When fine particles for scattering light are mixed into the transparent resin, the fine particles may have isotropic properties or may have anisotropy.
[0082] また、導光板に色調補正剤を混入させて出射光の色調を調節することも可能である 。また、導光板に色調補正剤を混入させる代わりに、液晶表示パネルに入射させる 光の色調を補正するために色補正フィルタを設けてもよい。さらには、色調補正剤を 混入させた導光板と、色調を補正するための色補正フィルタを併用することもできる。  [0082] It is also possible to adjust the color tone of the emitted light by mixing a color tone correction agent into the light guide plate. Further, instead of mixing a color tone correcting agent into the light guide plate, a color correction filter may be provided to correct the color tone of light incident on the liquid crystal display panel. Further, a light guide plate mixed with a color tone correcting agent and a color correction filter for correcting the color tone can be used in combination.
[0083] ここで、導光板に使用する透明部材には、青色を透過しやすい材料を用いることが 好ましい。例えば、光源が冷陰極管のような棒状光源の場合、透過部材の分光特性 により、液晶表示パネルの光射出面の色温度は、光源の色温度より低下する。このた め、あら力じめ光源の色温度を高めに設定する必要がある。し力しながら、光源の色 温度を高く設定すると輝度効率が低下することがある。導光板に使用する透明部材 に青色を透過しやす ヽ材料を用いることで、光源の色温度と液晶表示面の色温度を 同等にすることができる。これにより、光源から出射される高い輝度の光を、色温度を 低下させることなく液晶表示パネル力 出射させることができる。その結果、消費電力 をより低くすることができ、また、光源をより長寿命にすることができ、さらに、光源の数 およびインバータの数を減らしコストダウンすることができる。  Here, it is preferable to use a material that easily transmits blue light for the transparent member used for the light guide plate. For example, when the light source is a rod-shaped light source such as a cold-cathode tube, the color temperature of the light emitting surface of the liquid crystal display panel is lower than the color temperature of the light source due to the spectral characteristics of the transmission member. Therefore, the color temperature of the light source must be set higher. However, if the color temperature of the light source is set to a high value, the luminance efficiency may decrease. By using a material that easily transmits blue light for the transparent member used for the light guide plate, the color temperature of the light source and the color temperature of the liquid crystal display surface can be made equal. Thus, high-luminance light emitted from the light source can be emitted from the liquid crystal display panel without lowering the color temperature. As a result, power consumption can be reduced, the light source can have a longer life, and the number of light sources and inverters can be reduced to reduce costs.
また、導光板の光射出面側に除電材或いは導電材を塗布してもよい。これにより、 静電気によりバックライト内部に塵が堆積しにくくすることができる。  Further, a charge removing material or a conductive material may be applied to the light exit surface side of the light guide plate. This makes it difficult for dust to accumulate inside the backlight due to static electricity.
[0084] なお、上記の透明榭脂を選択する場合には、図 2Cに示すように光射出面 18aに対 して垂直で棒状光源 12の中心軸 0ェを含む面 Xから薄肉端部の端面 18hまでの距離 を L (mm)とし、棒状光源 12の中心 0ェから、光射出面 18aに平行で傾斜面 18dとの 交点 Pまでの距離を A L (mm)、光透過性榭脂の光透過率を t%、交点 Pから、光 射出面 18aに対して垂直な方向における光射出面 18aまでの距離を D (mm)としたと きに、少なくとも下記式が成立するように選択する事が好ましい。 When the above transparent resin is selected, as shown in FIG. 2C, the light emitting surface 18a is opposed to the light emitting surface 18a. The distance from the plane X including the center axis 0 of the rod-shaped light source 12 to the end face 18h of the thin-walled end is L (mm), and is inclined parallel to the light exit surface 18a from the center 0 of the rod-shaped light source 12 AL (mm) is the distance to the intersection P with the surface 18d, t is the light transmittance of the light transmitting resin, and the distance from the intersection P to the light exit surface 18a in the direction perpendicular to the light exit surface 18a. When D is set to D (mm), it is preferable to select at least the following expression.
t= { l -kl X (D/L- A L) } X 100  t = {l -kl X (D / L- A L)} X 100
ここで、 klは、導光板内部での光の減衰率を表すパラメータであり、導光板に用い る素材の内部透過率の観点から、 0<kl≤ 2とすることが好ま 、。  Here, kl is a parameter representing the attenuation rate of light inside the light guide plate, and is preferably set to 0 <kl ≦ 2 from the viewpoint of the internal transmittance of the material used for the light guide plate.
[0085] ここで、本発明の導光板にお!、て、平行溝の好ま 、形状にっ 、て詳細に説明す る。 Here, the light guide plate of the present invention will be described in detail with respect to the preferred shape and shape of the parallel groove.
図 2A〜図 2Cにおいては、導光板 18の平行溝 18fは、当該平行溝 18fの長さ方向 に垂直な断面形状 (以下、単に平行溝の断面形状と!/、う)が三角形状になるように形 成されている。ここでは、平行溝 18fの断面形状を三角形状としたが、本発明におい ては、平行溝 18fの断面形状は、当該平行溝 18fの最深部または中心を通って導光 板 18fの、光射出面に垂直な中心線に対して対称であって、光射出面 18aに向かつ て細くなるような形状であればよぐ例えば、図 15および図 16に示すように、双曲線 形状、楕円形状することができる。或いは、導光板 18の平行溝 18fの断面形状は懸 垂線形状でも良い。  2A to 2C, the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18 has a triangular cross-sectional shape perpendicular to the length direction of the parallel groove 18f (hereinafter, simply referred to as the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove! /). It is formed as follows. Here, the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove 18f is triangular, but in the present invention, the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove 18f is such that the light exits from the light guide plate 18f through the deepest portion or the center of the parallel groove 18f. Any shape that is symmetrical with respect to the center line perpendicular to the surface and narrows toward the light exit surface 18a may be used.For example, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, the shape may be a hyperbolic shape or an elliptical shape. be able to. Alternatively, the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18 may be a catenary shape.
[0086] また、本発明にお ヽては、平行溝の断面形状にお!ヽて、平行溝の最深部 (平行溝 を形成する側壁の接続部)が尖点となるような形状にすることもできる。すなわち、平 行溝の先端部分の断面形状が、互いに交わる先鋭な 1つの交点を有する、平行溝の 中心を通って導光板の光射出面に垂直な中心線に対して対称な 2つの曲線または 直線の一部力も形成することができる。本発明においては、導光板の平行溝の断面 形状が、上記いずれの形状であっても、導光板の光射出面から均一な光を出射させ ることがでさる。  [0086] Further, in the present invention, the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove is such that the deepest part (connection part of the side wall forming the parallel groove) of the parallel groove is a point. You can also. In other words, the cross-sectional shape of the leading end of the parallel groove has two sharp curves, each having one sharp intersection, which are symmetrical with respect to the center line perpendicular to the light exit surface of the light guide plate through the center of the parallel groove. A straight line partial force can also be formed. In the present invention, even if the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove of the light guide plate is any of the above shapes, uniform light can be emitted from the light exit surface of the light guide plate.
[0087] 図 17には、平行溝の先端部分の断面形状が、互いに交わる先鋭な 1つの交点を 有する、平行溝 18fの中心を通って導光板の光射出面に垂直な中心線に対して対 称な 2つの曲線の一部力もなる場合の一例を示した。図 17に示した導光板 50は、平 行溝の中心を通って導光板 50の光射出面 52に垂直な中心線 Xに対して対称な 2つ の曲線 54aおよび 54bが円弧の場合である。この場合は、図 17に示すように、平行 溝 18fを形成する一方の側壁に対応する円弧 54aの中心の位置と他方の側壁に対 応する円弧 54bの中心の位置が異なるように形成される。これにより円弧状の両側壁 が交わる部分 56は、図 17に示すように尖った形状となる。 [0087] FIG. 17 shows that the cross-sectional shape of the tip portion of the parallel groove is different from the center line perpendicular to the light exit surface of the light guide plate passing through the center of the parallel groove 18f, which has one sharp intersection point intersecting with each other. An example of the case where the partial force of the two symmetrical curves is also shown. The light guide plate 50 shown in FIG. Two curves 54a and 54b symmetrical with respect to a center line X perpendicular to the light exit surface 52 of the light guide plate 50 through the center of the row groove are the case of arcs. In this case, as shown in FIG. 17, the center position of the arc 54a corresponding to one side wall forming the parallel groove 18f is different from the center position of the arc 54b corresponding to the other side wall. . As a result, the portion 56 where the arc-shaped side walls intersect has a pointed shape as shown in FIG.
[0088] また、図 18には、平行溝の先端部分の断面形状力 互いに交わる先鋭な 1つの交 点を有する、平行溝の中心を通って導光板の光射出面に垂直な中心線に対して対 称な 2つの曲線の一部力もなる場合のさらに別の例を示した。図 18に示した導光板 6 0は、平行溝 18fの中心を通って導光板の光射出面に垂直な中心線 Xに対して対称 な 2つの曲線 64aおよび 64bが放物線の場合である。図 18においては、平行溝 18f の一方の側壁を形成する放物線 64aの焦点と、他方の側壁 22bを形成する放物線 6 4bの焦点とが互いに異なるように、平行溝 18fの側壁が形成される。  Further, FIG. 18 shows that the cross-sectional shape force of the front end portion of the parallel groove has a sharp point of intersection with one another and passes through the center of the parallel groove and is perpendicular to the center line perpendicular to the light exit surface of the light guide plate. Another example is shown in which the partial force of two symmetric curves is also obtained. In the light guide plate 60 shown in FIG. 18, two curves 64a and 64b symmetric with respect to a center line X passing through the center of the parallel groove 18f and perpendicular to the light exit surface of the light guide plate are parabolic. In FIG. 18, the side wall of the parallel groove 18f is formed such that the focus of the parabola 64a forming one side wall of the parallel groove 18f and the focus of the parabola 64b forming the other side wall 22b are different from each other.
[0089] 図 18に示すように、平行溝の先端部分の断面形状が、交点 66で交わる 2つの曲線 64aおよび 64bから形成される場合においては、平行溝 18fの一方の側壁に対応す る曲線 64aの、交点(尖点) 66における接線と、他方の側壁に対応する曲線 64bの、 交点 64における接線が互いになす角 Θは、 90度以下が好ましぐ 60度以下がより 一層好ましい。  As shown in FIG. 18, when the cross-sectional shape of the tip of the parallel groove is formed from two curves 64a and 64b intersecting at the intersection 66, a curve corresponding to one side wall of the parallel groove 18f The angle が between the tangent at the intersection (cusp) 66 of the point 64a and the tangent at the intersection 64 of the curve 64b corresponding to the other side wall of the curve 64b is preferably 90 degrees or less, more preferably 60 degrees or less.
[0090] 図 1〜図 18では、平行溝の断面形状において、平行溝の側壁を形成する曲線が、 平行溝の中心に向かって凹状の導光板の例を示したが、これらとは異なる本発明の 導光板の別の態様を図 19および図 20に示す。図 19は、平行溝 18fの断面形状が、 平行溝 18fの中心に向力つて凸の 2つの曲線 72aおよび 72bから形成される導光板 70の例であり、図 20は、平行溝 18fの断面形状が、平行溝 18fの中心に向かって凸 の曲線 82aおよび 82bと凹の曲線 84aおよび 84bを組み合わせた曲線から形成され る導光板 80の例である。図 19および図 20に示したような断面形状の平行溝を有す る導光板 70および 80も、輝線の発生を抑制しつつ光射出面力 十分な照度の光を 出射することができる。  FIGS. 1 to 18 show examples of the light guide plate in which the side wall of the parallel groove is concave toward the center of the parallel groove in the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove. Another embodiment of the light guide plate of the present invention is shown in FIGS. FIG. 19 is an example of a light guide plate 70 in which the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove 18f is formed from two curves 72a and 72b that are convex toward the center of the parallel groove 18f, and FIG. 20 is a cross-sectional view of the parallel groove 18f. This is an example of the light guide plate 80 having a shape formed by combining curves 82a and 82b convex toward the center of the parallel groove 18f and curves 84a and 84b concave. The light guide plates 70 and 80 having parallel grooves having a cross-sectional shape as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20 can also emit light with sufficient light emission surface power while suppressing the generation of bright lines.
[0091] このように、本発明にお 、ては、導光板の平行溝の断面形状にお!、て、平行溝に 相当する部分は、平行溝の中心に向力つて凸若しくは凹の曲線状または直線状に することができ、それらの組み合わせであってもよい。これらの曲線は、図示例の円弧 に限定されず、平行溝の中心に向力つて凸または凹の、楕円、放物線、または双曲 線などの曲線の一部であればよい。また、本発明においては、平行溝の先端部分の 断面形状が、後述するように先細化されていれば、平行溝を構成する曲線は、平行 溝の中心に向かって凸または凹の、円、楕円、放物線、または双曲線などの曲線の 一部であれば良ぐ 10次の関数によって近似できる曲線であることが好ましい。 As described above, in the present invention, in the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove of the light guide plate, the portion corresponding to the parallel groove has a convex or concave curve directed toward the center of the parallel groove. Shape or linear And a combination thereof. These curves are not limited to the arcs in the illustrated example, and may be any part of a curve such as an ellipse, a parabola, or a hyperbola that is convex or concave toward the center of the parallel groove. Further, in the present invention, if the cross-sectional shape of the tip portion of the parallel groove is tapered as described later, the curve constituting the parallel groove will be a circle or a convex or concave toward the center of the parallel groove. If it is a part of a curve such as an ellipse, a parabola, or a hyperbola, it is preferable that the curve be a curve that can be approximated by a 10th order function.
[0092] 本発明の導光板においては、図 21に示すように、ある中心線 Xにおいて網点の密 度が高くその中心線 Xから両側(中心線に対して垂直方向)に向力うにしたがって次 第に網点の密度が低くなるような網点パターン 92を導光板 18の光射出面 18aに、例 えば、印刷により形成してもよい。このような網点パターン 92を、網点パターンの中心 線 Xが導光板 18の平行溝の中心線に対応する位置と一致するように、導光板 18の 光射出面 18aに形成することにより、導光板 18の光射出面 18aにおける輝線の発生 やムラを抑制することができる。また、網点パターン 92を導光板 18に印刷する代わり に、網点パターンが形成された薄いシートを光射出面上に積層しても良い。網点の 形状は、矩形、円形、楕円形などを任意の形状にすることができ、網点の密度は、輝 線の強さや広がりに応じて適宜選択することができる。また、このような網点パターン を印刷により形成する代わりに、網点パターンに対応する部分を砂擦り面として荒ら してもよい。このような砂擦り面は、導光板の平行溝の最深部や側壁に形成してもよ い。 In the light guide plate of the present invention, as shown in FIG. 21, the density of the halftone dots is high at a certain center line X, and as the halftone dot moves toward both sides (perpendicular to the center line) from the center line X, as shown in FIG. Next, a halftone dot pattern 92 having a low halftone dot density may be formed on the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18, for example, by printing. By forming such a halftone dot pattern 92 on the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 so that the center line X of the halftone dot pattern coincides with the position corresponding to the center line of the parallel groove of the light guide plate 18, The generation and unevenness of bright lines on the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 can be suppressed. Instead of printing the halftone dot pattern 92 on the light guide plate 18, a thin sheet having the halftone dot pattern formed thereon may be laminated on the light exit surface. The shape of the halftone dot can be an arbitrary shape such as a rectangle, a circle, and an ellipse, and the density of the halftone dot can be appropriately selected according to the intensity and spread of the bright line. Instead of forming such a halftone dot pattern by printing, a portion corresponding to the halftone dot pattern may be roughened as a sand rubbing surface. Such a sand rubbing surface may be formed on the deepest portion or the side wall of the parallel groove of the light guide plate.
[0093] つぎに、導光板の平行溝の断面形状を種々の形状に変更したときに、導光板の光 射出面から出射する光の照度分布について調べた。まず、本発明に従う導光板の例 として、平行溝 18fの断面形状が図 2A〜図 2Cおよび図 15にそれぞれ示すような三 角形および双曲線の場合と、従来の導光板の例として断面形状が放物線、半円形( 力まぼこ形)の場合について調べた。図 22に、それらの導光板の光出射側の面にお ける相対照度分布を示す。図 22において、縦軸は相対照度を示し、横軸は、導光板 の中心位置 (平行溝の中心部分)からの距離を示す。ここで、相対照度は、次のよう にして測定した。  [0093] Next, the illuminance distribution of light emitted from the light exit surface of the light guide plate when the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove of the light guide plate was changed to various shapes was examined. First, as an example of the light guide plate according to the present invention, the parallel groove 18f has a triangular or hyperbolic cross-sectional shape as shown in FIGS. 2A to 2C and FIG. 15, and a conventional light guide plate has a parabolic cross-sectional shape. , And a semicircular shape. FIG. 22 shows the relative illuminance distributions on the light exit side surfaces of the light guide plates. In FIG. 22, the vertical axis indicates the relative illuminance, and the horizontal axis indicates the distance from the center position of the light guide plate (the center of the parallel groove). Here, the relative illuminance was measured as follows.
[0094] 本発明の導光板に光源を組み込み、導光板内に光を入射して光射出面より光が出 射するようにした状態で、 XYステージに固定し、導光板の出射面に垂直になるように 照度計を固定する。そして照度計によって光射出面の位置における照度を測定して 導光板の光射出面の特定位置に関する、照度の情報を得る。 [0094] A light source is incorporated in the light guide plate of the present invention, and light enters the light guide plate to emit light from the light exit surface. Then, fix the illuminometer so that it is perpendicular to the emission surface of the light guide plate. Then, the illuminance is measured at the position of the light exit surface by the illuminometer to obtain information of the illuminance regarding the specific position of the light exit surface of the light guide plate.
その後、 XYステージを移動させることにより、光射出面上の位置と照度の関係を求 めて、その全面の平均値を算出する。各位置における照度をこの照度の平均値をそ れぞれ割り返した比率力 その位置における相対照度となる。  Then, by moving the XY stage, the relationship between the position on the light emitting surface and the illuminance is determined, and the average value of the entire surface is calculated. The ratio of the illuminance at each position divided by the average value of the illuminance, respectively, is the relative illuminance at that position.
なお、平行溝の軸方向に垂直な方向 1軸を測定してその値を代表させることで、断 面形状の比較等を簡便に行うこともできる。  In addition, by measuring one axis perpendicular to the axial direction of the parallel groove and representing the value, it is possible to easily compare the cross-sectional shapes.
なお、相対輝度を測定する場合には、照度計の代わりに輝度計を用いればよぐこ れにより、導光板の光出射側の面における相対輝度分布を得ることができる。  When measuring the relative luminance, a luminance meter may be used instead of the illuminometer, whereby the relative luminance distribution on the light emission side surface of the light guide plate can be obtained.
[0095] 図 22からわ力るように、導光板の平行溝の断面形状を双曲線にした場合に、平行 溝に対応する部分における相対照度のピーク値が、傾斜背面部力 の出射光によつ て形成される相対照度の平均値の 10倍以下となっており、光射出面力もの照度が略 均一になっていることがわかる。一方、平行溝の断面形状が半円形または放物線形 の従来の導光板においては、図 22に示すように、平行溝の中心部分、すなわち、光 源の直上の位置において相対照度が高くなつており、輝線が発生していることがわか る。すなわち、従来の平行溝の断面形状が半円形状または放物線形状の導光板に ぉ 、ては、光照射面における照度が均一ではな 、。  [0095] As can be seen from Fig. 22, when the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove of the light guide plate is hyperbolic, the peak value of relative illuminance at the portion corresponding to the parallel groove is due to the emitted light of the inclined back surface force. Therefore, the illuminance of the light emitting surface is almost uniform. On the other hand, in a conventional light guide plate having a semicircular or parabolic cross section, the relative illuminance is high at the center of the parallel groove, that is, at a position immediately above the light source, as shown in FIG. It can be seen that a bright line is generated. That is, in the conventional light guide plate having a semicircular or parabolic cross section, the illuminance on the light irradiation surface is not uniform.
[0096] また、平行溝の断面形状が三角形状の導光板においては、中心部分の相対照度 は低くなつている。このような平行溝の断面形状が三角形状の場合は、以下に示すよ うに、頂点を所定の幅で平坦にする力 比較的曲率半径の小さな曲面にすることによ つて、光射出面における照度を均一化することができる。  [0096] In a light guide plate in which the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove is triangular, the relative illuminance at the center is low. When the cross-sectional shape of such a parallel groove is triangular, as shown below, the force for flattening the apex with a predetermined width and the illuminance on the light exit surface are obtained by forming the curved surface with a relatively small radius of curvature. Can be made uniform.
[0097] 図 23に、導光板の平行溝の断面形状が三角形状の場合において、平行溝の最深 部(三角形状の平行溝の頂点部分)を平坦化し、その平坦部分の長さを種々の値に 変化させたときに導光板の光射出面力 出射する光の照度分布を示す。図 23にお いて、縦軸は相対照度を示し、横軸は、導光板に形成された平行溝の中心部からの 距離を示す。ここでは、計算を簡単化するために、冷陰極管の直径を 3mmとし、平 坦部分の長さを 1. 5mm、 1. Omm、 0. 5mm、 0. 25mmとした。図 24A〜図 24Dに 、平行溝の断面形状が三角形の場合に、平行溝の最深部の平坦部分の長さが 1. 5 mm、 1. Omm、 0. 5mm、 0. 25mmの導光板の概略断面図をそれぞれ示した。 FIG. 23 shows that, when the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove of the light guide plate is triangular, the deepest portion of the parallel groove (the apex of the triangular parallel groove) is flattened, and the length of the flat portion is varied. It shows the illuminance distribution of the emitted light when the light exit surface force of the light guide plate is changed. In FIG. 23, the vertical axis indicates the relative illuminance, and the horizontal axis indicates the distance from the center of the parallel groove formed in the light guide plate. Here, in order to simplify the calculation, the diameter of the cold cathode tube was 3 mm, and the length of the flat part was 1.5 mm, 1.0 mm, 0.5 mm, and 0.25 mm. Figures 24A to 24D In the case where the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove is triangular, the schematic cross-sectional views of the light guide plate with the flat part at the deepest part of the parallel groove being 1.5 mm, 1. Omm, 0.5 mm, 0.25 mm are shown, respectively. Was.
[0098] 図 23のグラフに示すように、平坦部分の長さに応じて、導光板の平行溝に対応す る部分における相対照度が変化することがわかる。ここで、本発明においては、平行 溝の最深部の平端部分を長くすることで照度を高めることができるが、長すぎると輝 線となる恐れがあるため、平端部分の長さは、冷陰極管の直径の 20%以下とすること が好ましぐ 10%以下とすることがより好ましい。  [0098] As shown in the graph of Fig. 23, it can be seen that the relative illuminance at a portion corresponding to the parallel groove of the light guide plate changes according to the length of the flat portion. Here, in the present invention, the illuminance can be increased by lengthening the flat end portion at the deepest portion of the parallel groove. However, if the length is too long, there is a possibility that a bright line is formed. The diameter is preferably 20% or less of the diameter of the tube, more preferably 10% or less.
[0099] 図 25には、導光板の平行溝の断面形状が三角形状の導光板において、平行溝の 最深部の形状を曲率半径 Rの曲面形状にし、その曲面の曲率半径を種々の値に変 ィ匕させたときに導光板の光射出面力 出射する光の照度分布を示した。ここでは、冷 陰極管の半径を 3mmとし、頂点部分の曲率半径が 0. 25mm, 0. 5mm、 1. Omm、 1. 5mmの導光板について測定した。図 26A〜図 26Dに、平行溝の断面形状が三 角形の場合に、頂点部分の曲率半径が 0. 25mm, 0. 5mm、 1. Omm、 1. 5mmの 導光板の概略断面図をそれぞれ示した。図 25のグラフから、平行溝の頂点部分の曲 率半径に応じて、導光板の平行溝に対応する部分における相対照度が変化し、頂 点部分の曲率半径 Rが 0. 25mmにおいて導光板の光射出面における相対照度が 略均一化されて 、るのがわかる。  [0099] Fig. 25 shows that in the light guide plate in which the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove of the light guide plate is triangular, the shape of the deepest portion of the parallel groove is a curved surface having a radius of curvature R, and the radius of curvature of the curved surface is varied. The light exit surface power of the light guide plate when the light guide plate was transformed was shown as the illuminance distribution of the emitted light. Here, the radius of the cold-cathode tube was 3 mm, and the radii of curvature at the apexes were measured at 0.25 mm, 0.5 mm, 1.0 mm, and 1.5 mm. Figures 26A to 26D show schematic cross-sectional views of light guide plates with the radii of curvature at the vertices of 0.25mm, 0.5mm, 1.Omm, and 1.5mm, respectively, when the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove is triangular. Was. From the graph of Fig. 25, the relative illuminance at the portion corresponding to the parallel groove of the light guide plate changes according to the radius of curvature of the vertex portion of the parallel groove. It can be seen that the relative illuminance on the light exit surface is substantially uniform.
[0100] 以上から、導光板の平行溝の先端部分の形状が光射出面力 の照度に大きく依存 することがゎカゝる。すなわち、導光板の平行溝の形状を本発明で示した形状になるよ うに設計するだけで、導光板の光射出面における照度を最適に調整して均一化する ことができることがゎカゝる。  [0100] From the above, it is apparent that the shape of the tip of the parallel groove of the light guide plate greatly depends on the illuminance of the light exit surface force. That is, the illuminance on the light exit surface of the light guide plate can be optimally adjusted and made uniform only by designing the shape of the parallel grooves of the light guide plate to have the shape shown in the present invention. .
導光板の表面において、照度と輝度は略同様に扱うことができる。それゆえ、図 23 および図 25の相対照度のグラフから、本発明においては、輝度においても同様の傾 向があると推測される。したがって、導光板の平行溝の形状を本発明で示した形状に なるように設計することで、導光板の光射出面における輝度についても均一化できる と考えられる。  On the surface of the light guide plate, illuminance and luminance can be handled in substantially the same manner. Therefore, from the relative illuminance graphs of FIGS. 23 and 25, it is inferred that in the present invention, there is a similar tendency in luminance. Therefore, it is considered that by designing the shape of the parallel groove of the light guide plate so as to have the shape shown in the present invention, the luminance on the light exit surface of the light guide plate can also be made uniform.
なお、平行溝の先端部分の頂部 (最深部)の断面形状が、平行溝の中心線に対し て対称に先鋭な 1つの交点が、面取りされた平坦状、もしくは、丸められた円形状の みならず、楕円形状、放物線状、または双曲線状であっても良いのはもちろんである 。さらに、これに加え、上述したように、平行溝の先端部分の頂部 (最深部)を砂擦り 面とすることにより、照度または輝度のピーク値を低減するようにしても良い。 The cross-sectional shape of the top (deepest) of the tip of the parallel groove is such that one point of intersection that is sharply symmetrical with respect to the center line of the parallel groove is a chamfered flat shape or a rounded circular shape. Needless to say, the shape may be elliptical, parabolic, or hyperbolic. In addition, as described above, the peak (the deepest part) of the tip of the parallel groove may be a sand rubbing surface to reduce the illuminance or luminance peak value.
[0101] 以上から、本発明の導光板においては、導光板 18の光射出面 18aにおける平行 溝 18f以外、すなわち傾斜背面 18dに相当する部分 (第 2部分)に形成される照度の 平均値に対する、導光板 18の光射出面 18aにおける平行溝 18fに相当する部分 (第 1部分)に形成される輝線のピーク値 (照度のピーク値)の比に応じて、導光板 18の 平行溝 18fの先端形状の先細化を行う、すなわち、この比の値に応じて、導光板 18 の平行溝 18fの先端形状の先細化の程度を制御することが好ましい。なお、この場 合、この比は、 3以下、より好ましくは、 2以下とするのが好ましい。  [0101] As described above, in the light guide plate of the present invention, the average value of the illuminance formed on the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 other than the parallel groove 18f, that is, on the portion (second portion) corresponding to the inclined back surface 18d. In accordance with the ratio of the peak value (peak value of illuminance) of the bright line formed in the portion (first portion) corresponding to the parallel groove 18f on the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18, It is preferable to taper the tip shape, that is, to control the degree of tapering of the tip shape of the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18 according to the value of this ratio. In this case, the ratio is preferably 3 or less, more preferably 2 or less.
[0102] なお、この比は、ノ ックライトユニット 2の厚み (導光板 18の光射出面 18aと拡散シ ート 14との間の距離)や、ノ ックライトユニット 2において使用される拡散シート 14の 拡散効率や枚数、プリズムシート 16、 17および 19の拡散効率や使用枚数等に応じ て、設定するのが好ましい。すなわち、ノ ックライトユニット 2の厚み (導光板 18の光射 出面 18aと拡散シート 14との間の距離)がある程度厚く(または大きく)できる場合や、 ノ ックライトユニット 2において使用される拡散シート 14の拡散効率が高ぐ使用枚数 を多くできる場合や、プリズムシート 16、 17および 19の拡散効率が高ぐ使用枚数を 多くできる場合には、導光板 18の光射出面 18aから射出された照明光の拡散 (ミキシ ングなど)を十分に行うことができるので、高コストとはなる力 導光板 18の光射出面 1 8aの第 2部分の照度の平均値に対する、導光板 18の光射出面 18aの第 1部分の照 度のピーク値の比を、ある程度大きく設定することができる。しかし、そうでない場合に は、低コストィ匕できる力 この比の値を小さく設定する必要がある。  [0102] This ratio depends on the thickness of the knock light unit 2 (the distance between the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 and the diffusion sheet 14) and the diffusion sheet used in the knock light unit 2. It is preferable to set according to the diffusion efficiency and the number of sheets of 14, and the diffusion efficiency and the number of sheets used of the prism sheets 16, 17 and 19. That is, the thickness of the knock light unit 2 (the distance between the light emitting surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 and the diffusion sheet 14) can be increased (or increased) to some extent, or the diffusion sheet used in the knock light unit 2 can be increased. If the diffusion efficiency of 14 can be increased and the number of used sheets can be increased, or the diffusion efficiency of prism sheets 16, 17 and 19 can be increased, the light emitted from the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 can be used. A light-emitting surface of the light guide plate 18 with respect to the average value of the illuminance of the second portion of the light guide plate 18a, which is a high cost because light diffusion (mixing, etc.) can be performed sufficiently. The ratio of the peak values of the illuminance of the first portion of 18a can be set to a somewhat large value. However, if this is not the case, it is necessary to set the value of this ratio small enough to achieve low cost.
[0103] また、本発明の導光板においては、導光板 18の光射出面 18aの第 1部分の照度の ピーク値が、導光板 18の光射出面 18aの第 2部分の照度の平均値の 3倍以下、より 好ましくは、 2倍以下となるように、導光板 18の平行溝 18fの先端形状の先細化を行 うことが好ましい。ここで、導光板 18の光射出面 18aの第 1部分の照度のピーク値が 、導光板 18の光射出面 18aの第 2部分の照度の平均値の 3倍以下となるようにする のは、導光板 18の光射出面 18aから射出された照明光の照度分布が、従来より均一 ィ匕される力 であり、その結果、導光板 18の光射出面 18aから射出された照明光の 拡散 (ミキシングなど)をそれほど十分に行う必要がなく、拡散効率のあまり高くな ヽ低 コストの拡散シート 14の使用が可能となり、また使用枚数を減らすことができ、また、 高価なプリズムシート 16、 17および 19自体の使用を止めることができ、あるいは、拡 散効率のあまり高くない低コストのプリズムシート 16、 17および 19の使用が可能とな つたり、使用枚数を減らすことができるからである。 [0103] In the light guide plate of the present invention, the peak value of the illuminance of the first portion of the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 is equal to the average value of the illuminance of the second portion of the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18. It is preferable to taper the tip shape of the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18 so as to be three times or less, more preferably two times or less. Here, the reason why the peak value of the illuminance of the first portion of the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 is three times or less the average value of the illuminance of the second portion of the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 is as follows. The illuminance distribution of the illumination light emitted from the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 is more uniform than before. As a result, the illumination light emitted from the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 does not need to be sufficiently diffused (mixing, etc.), and the diffusion efficiency is extremely high. The use of the diffusion sheet 14 is possible, the number of sheets used can be reduced, and the use of the expensive prism sheets 16, 17, and 19 itself can be stopped. This is because the prism sheets 16, 17 and 19 can be used and the number of sheets used can be reduced.
[0104] なお、本発明の第 1の態様の導光板では、導光板 18の平行溝 18fの断面形状に おいて、平行溝 18fの先細化を行う先端部分は、棒状光源 12の中心力も光射出面 1 8aに向力 垂線 (X)に対する角度力 両側で 90度以内となる部分、より好ましくは、 6 0度以内となる部分とするのが好ましい。すなわち、本発明において、導光板 18の光 射出面 18aの平行溝 18fに相当する第 1部分の照度のピーク値を低減するために、 平行溝 18fの先細化を行う部分は、平行溝 18fの全体でも良いが、ピーク値の低減 化が可能であれば、所定の先端部分で良い。  In the light guide plate according to the first embodiment of the present invention, in the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove 18 f of the light guide plate 18, the tapered tip portion of the parallel groove 18 f has a central force of the rod-shaped light source 12. Direction force on the emission surface 18a Angular force with respect to the perpendicular (X) Both sides are preferably within 90 degrees, more preferably within 60 degrees. That is, in the present invention, in order to reduce the peak value of the illuminance of the first portion corresponding to the parallel groove 18f of the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18, the portion where the parallel groove 18f is tapered is the parallel groove 18f. The whole may be used, but if the peak value can be reduced, a predetermined tip may be used.
[0105] 本発明においては、導光板 18の平行溝 18fを上述したような形状にするとともに、 傾斜面の傾斜角度 Φ 1および、傾斜面の最端部における傾斜角度 Φ 2を、前述した ように、 Φ 2く Φ 1を満足することにより、導光板を複数連結した時に、それぞれの導 光板からの輝線の発生を抑制するとともに、連結部分における輝線の発生をも抑制 することができる。本発明においては、導光板を複数並べて配置することにより、光射 出面から出射する光束の光量分布が均一で、輝線の発生が抑制された大サイズの 光照射面を有するノ ックライトユニットとすることができる。そして、このような大サイズ の光照射面を有するバックライトユニットは、大サイズの表示画面を有する液晶表示 装置に適用することができ、特に、壁掛けテレビなどの壁掛けタイプの液晶表示装置 に最適である。  [0105] In the present invention, the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18 is shaped as described above, and the inclination angle Φ1 of the inclined surface and the inclination angle Φ2 at the extreme end of the inclined surface are as described above. In addition, by satisfying Φ 2 and Φ 1, when a plurality of light guide plates are connected, it is possible to suppress the generation of bright lines from each of the light guide plates and also to suppress the generation of bright lines at the connected portions. In the present invention, by arranging a plurality of light guide plates side by side, a knock light unit having a large-sized light irradiation surface in which the light quantity distribution of the light flux emitted from the light emission surface is uniform and the generation of bright lines is suppressed. be able to. A backlight unit having such a large-sized light irradiation surface can be applied to a liquid crystal display device having a large-sized display screen, and is particularly suitable for a wall-mounted liquid crystal display device such as a wall-mounted television. is there.
[0106] 以上、本発明の導光板およびそれを備えるバックライトユニット並びに液晶表示装 置について詳細に説明したが、本発明は上記実施態様に限定はされず、本発明の 主旨を逸脱しない範囲において、各種の改良や変更をしてもよいのはもちろんである  As described above, the light guide plate of the present invention, the backlight unit including the same, and the liquid crystal display device have been described in detail. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and is not departed from the gist of the present invention. Of course, various improvements and changes may be made
[0107] 例えば、上記実施の形態では、図 2Bに示しような形状の導光板を一つの構成単位 とし、その導光板を複数連結して大型の導光板を形成した形態につ 1ヽて説明したが 、出射光の均一性を高める上では 2個以上の本発明の導光板を連結した形状の構 造体を一体で成形し、その構造体を 1つの導光板として利用することが好ましい。特 に、製造効率を高めるという観点からは、使用する液晶表示パネルの画面サイズに 応じ、その液晶パネルを照明するのに必要な数の本発明の導光板を一体で成形す ることが好ましい。このような構成にすることにより、一枚の導光板で、光射出面から出 射する光束の光量分布が均一で、輝線の発生が抑制された大サイズの光照射面を 有する薄型のノ ックライトユニットを実現することができる。また、このような一体の導 光板は、例えば、押出成形法を用いて容易に製造することができる。 For example, in the above embodiment, a light guide plate having a shape as shown in FIG. Although the configuration in which a plurality of the light guide plates are connected to form a large light guide plate has been described, in order to enhance the uniformity of emitted light, a shape in which two or more light guide plates of the present invention are connected is described. It is preferable to form the structure integrally and use the structure as one light guide plate. In particular, from the viewpoint of improving the manufacturing efficiency, it is preferable to integrally form as many light guide plates as necessary for illuminating the liquid crystal panel according to the screen size of the liquid crystal display panel to be used. With such a configuration, with a single light guide plate, the light quantity distribution of the luminous flux emitted from the light exit surface is uniform, and a thin knob having a large-sized light irradiation surface with suppressed generation of bright lines is provided. A light unit can be realized. Further, such an integrated light guide plate can be easily manufactured by using, for example, an extrusion molding method.
[0108] また、図 1に示したように、本発明の導光板を複数連結する場合は、一方の導光板 の端面部力 他方の導光板に向かって光が透過する際に、その端面部において光 の散乱などが生じる恐れがある。し力しながら、複数の導光板が一体となって成形さ れた導光板においては、そのような端面部での光の散乱は発生しないので、光源か らの光の利用効率をさらに高めることができる。  Further, as shown in FIG. 1, when a plurality of light guide plates of the present invention are connected to each other, when light is transmitted toward one light guide plate, In such a case, light scattering may occur. However, in a light guide plate formed by integrating a plurality of light guide plates, such light scattering does not occur at the end face, so that the efficiency of use of light from the light source is further improved. Can be.
[0109] また、上記実施形態においては、複数連結された導光板の光出射面が平坦、すな わち、面一になるように構成した力 各導光板の光射出面が必ずしも平坦になるよう に構成しなくてもよぐ複数連結したときの導光板の光射出面の全面が同一の曲面に なるように構成してもよ 、し、導光板の光射出面の一部の面が曲面になるように構成 してもよい。あるいは、複数連結したときの導光板の光射出面の全面に一定周期の 起伏が形成されるように各導光板を構成することもできる。また、光射出面の全面また は一部に、砂擦り面、または、多数のディンプル若しくは微小な多数の突起物を形成 したり、多数の散乱体を印刷により形成してもよい。このような砂擦り面やディンプル、 突起物、散乱体によって、導光板の光射出面における輝線の発生を抑制させること ちでさる。  In the above embodiment, the light exit surfaces of the plurality of connected light guide plates are flat, that is, the light exit surfaces of the respective light guide plates are necessarily flat. The light guide plate may be configured such that the entire light exit surface of the light guide plate when a plurality of light guide plates are connected has the same curved surface. It may be configured to have a curved surface. Alternatively, each light guide plate may be configured such that undulations with a constant period are formed on the entire light exit surface of the light guide plate when a plurality of light guide plates are connected. Also, a sand rubbing surface, a large number of dimples or a large number of minute projections, or a large number of scatterers may be formed by printing on the entire surface or a part of the light exit surface. Such a sand rubbing surface, dimples, protrusions, and scatterers tend to suppress the generation of bright lines on the light exit surface of the light guide plate.
[0110] また、図 35に示すように、複数の導光板 18を連結することによって大サイズのバッ クライトユニットを構成する場合には、連結された導光板 18の光射射出面における輝 度ムラの発生を抑制するための網点が形成された 1枚の網点シート 350を、連結され た複数の導光板 18の光射出面を覆うように配置することが好ましい。このような網点 シート 350は、連結される導光板 18の数に応じて種々の大きさにすることができ、網 点シート 18の網点は、導光板 18の光出射面の輝線の発生位置に配置される。 このような網点シート 350の材料は、熱変化の影響を抑制する観点から、導光板 18 と同一な材料、または熱膨張率が略等しぐかつ透過率や拡散効果が高い材料を用 いることが好ましい。このような材料を用いて網点シートを構成にすることにより、製造 環境や使用環境に伴う温湿度変化によって、網点シートの網点の位置が導光板の 光射出面の輝線の発生位置とずれることが抑制され、導光板ユニットの光射出面か ら出射する光の照度分布における変化を抑えることができる。 As shown in FIG. 35, when a large-sized backlight unit is formed by connecting a plurality of light guide plates 18, the brightness unevenness on the light emitting surface of the connected light guide plates 18 is reduced. It is preferable that one halftone sheet 350 on which halftone dots for suppressing the occurrence of light are formed is arranged so as to cover the light exit surfaces of the plurality of connected light guide plates 18. Such a dot The sheet 350 can have various sizes according to the number of the light guide plates 18 to be connected, and the halftone dots of the halftone sheet 18 are arranged at the positions where the bright lines on the light exit surface of the light guide plate 18 are generated. . As the material of the halftone sheet 350, the same material as that of the light guide plate 18 or a material having substantially the same thermal expansion coefficient and high transmittance and diffusion effect is used from the viewpoint of suppressing the influence of thermal change. Is preferred. By forming a halftone sheet using such a material, the position of the halftone dot of the halftone dot sheet will be different from the position of the bright line on the light exit surface of the light guide plate due to changes in temperature and humidity due to the manufacturing environment and use environment. Deviation is suppressed, and a change in the illuminance distribution of light emitted from the light exit surface of the light guide plate unit can be suppressed.
[0111] また、導光板は、図 2Bに示した導光板 18において、光源を配置するための平行溝 の中心線に沿って分割されたような構造を有してもょ ヽ。このような構造を有する導光 板を用いる場合は、図 2Bに示した構造の導光板 18の平行溝 18fに相当する部分に おいて導光板が互いに連結されるので、その連結部分が、網点シートにおける網点 の密度が最も高い部分と一致するように、網点シートを配置することが好ましい。さら に、複数の導光板を連結する場合に、一部の導光板を、平行溝の中心線に沿って分 割された構造で構成し、それ以外の導光板を図 2Bに示したような構造で構成したと きは、連結部分以外における導光板の平行溝の中心線に対応する位置における網 点の密度を高くするように、網点シートの網点パターンを形成することが好まし 、。 このような網点パターンを形成することにより、複数の導光板を連結して大サイズの ノ ックライトユニットを製造する場合に、複数の導光板の連結部分における輝線の発 生やムラを抑制することができる。このような網点シートは裏面に接着層を積層するこ とにより導光板と接合することができる。  [0111] Further, the light guide plate may have a structure such that it is divided along the center line of the parallel groove for arranging the light source in light guide plate 18 shown in FIG. 2B. When a light guide plate having such a structure is used, the light guide plates are connected to each other at a portion corresponding to the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18 having the structure shown in FIG. 2B. It is preferable to arrange the halftone sheets so as to coincide with the portion having the highest density of halftone dots in the dot sheet. Furthermore, when connecting a plurality of light guide plates, some light guide plates are configured with a structure divided along the center line of the parallel groove, and the other light guide plates are as shown in Fig. 2B. When configured with a structure, it is preferable to form a halftone dot pattern of a halftone dot sheet so as to increase the density of halftone dots at a position corresponding to the center line of the parallel groove of the light guide plate other than the connection portion, . By forming such a dot pattern, when a plurality of light guide plates are connected to manufacture a large-sized knock light unit, generation and unevenness of a bright line at a connection portion of the plurality of light guide plates are suppressed. be able to. Such a dot sheet can be bonded to the light guide plate by laminating an adhesive layer on the back surface.
[0112] また、このような網点シートを、複数連結された導光板の光射出面に配置させる際 に、網点シートに形成された網点パターンの位置を、導光板の平行溝の中心線に対 応する位置と正確且つ確実に一致させるために、例えば、導光板の光射出面の、光 射出領域として利用しない領域と、その位置に対応する網点シートの位置に、位置 決め用の穴を形成することが好まし 、。これら位置決め用の穴にピンなどの固定具を 通すことによって、導光板の輝線発生位置と網点シートの網点の位置を正確且つ確 実に位置決めすることができる。位置決め用の穴の形成位置は、光射出領域として 利用しない領域であれば特に限定されないが、温湿度変化による影響などによる、 網点パターンと、導光板の平行溝の中心線に対応する位置とのずれを低減するため に、導光板の平行溝の長さ方向の端部側で、導光板の平行溝の中心線に対して垂 直な方向の光射出面の略中央に穴を形成することが好ましい。 When such a halftone sheet is arranged on the light emitting surface of a plurality of connected light guide plates, the position of the halftone dot pattern formed on the halftone sheet is determined by the center of the parallel groove of the light guide plate. In order to accurately and reliably match the position corresponding to the line, for example, an area not used as a light emitting area on the light emitting surface of the light guide plate and a position of the dot sheet corresponding to the position are used for positioning. It is preferable to form holes. By passing a fixing tool such as a pin through these positioning holes, it is possible to accurately and reliably position the bright line generating position of the light guide plate and the position of the halftone dot of the halftone dot sheet. The position of the hole for positioning is The area is not particularly limited as long as it is not used.However, in order to reduce the shift between the halftone dot pattern and the position corresponding to the center line of the parallel groove of the light guide plate due to the influence of temperature and humidity changes, the parallel groove of the light guide plate is used. It is preferable to form a hole at the substantially end of the light exit surface in the direction perpendicular to the center line of the parallel groove of the light guide plate on the end side in the length direction.
[0113] また、網点シートは、結合した導光板の中央付近で導光板に対し、位置規制され、 外周部は厚みのみにて間隙を持ち嵌合される事が望ましい。  [0113] Further, it is desirable that the position of the halftone dot sheet is regulated with respect to the light guide plate in the vicinity of the center of the combined light guide plate, and that the outer peripheral portion is fitted with a gap only by its thickness.
[0114] また、本発明の導光板において、側面の面積などを考慮して、図 27Aに示すように 、導光板 18の側面に反射板 24を配置してもよい。また、上述したように、導光板 18を 複数配置する場合には、図 27Bに示すように、最も外側に配置される導光板 18の側 面に反射板 24を配置すればょ 、。このような反射板 24を側面に配置することで導光 板 24の側面からの光の漏出を防止することができ、光利用効率を一層高めることが できる。反射板 24は、前述した反射シートやリフレクタと同様な材料を用いて形成す ることがでさる。  Further, in the light guide plate of the present invention, the reflection plate 24 may be arranged on the side surface of the light guide plate 18 as shown in FIG. 27A in consideration of the area of the side surface and the like. Further, as described above, when a plurality of light guide plates 18 are arranged, as shown in FIG. 27B, the reflection plate 24 may be arranged on the side surface of the outermost light guide plate 18. By arranging such a reflection plate 24 on the side surface, it is possible to prevent light from leaking from the side surface of the light guide plate 24, and it is possible to further enhance the light use efficiency. The reflecting plate 24 can be formed using the same material as the above-mentioned reflecting sheet or reflector.
[0115] さらに、図 36Aおよび図 36Bに示すように、導光板 18の光源 12の長手方向の側面 に、前述した反射シート 22やリフレクタと同様の材料の反射板 362を配置しても良い 。これにより、出射効率をより向上させることができ、さらに、光源 12の長手方向にお ける導光板 18の端部での輝度むらを低減させることができる。  Further, as shown in FIG. 36A and FIG. 36B, a reflective plate 362 made of the same material as the above-described reflective sheet 22 and reflector may be disposed on a side surface of the light guide plate 18 in the longitudinal direction of the light source 12. As a result, the emission efficiency can be further improved, and the uneven brightness at the end of the light guide plate 18 in the longitudinal direction of the light source 12 can be reduced.
[0116] また、光源の長手方向において、光源の輝度分布が平坦でない場合、導光板の平 行溝の形状、特に先端部分の角度を、光源の長手方向における位置に応じて調整 する方法もある。例えば、光源の長手方向において、端部から中央部に向かうに従つ て光源の輝度が高くなる場合は、図 37A〜図 37Dに示すように、光源 12の長手方 向において、導光板 18の端部(図 37Bおよび図 37D参照)からの中央部(図 37C参 照)に向かうに従って導光板 18の平行溝 18fの先端部分の角度が大きくなる形状と してちよい。  When the brightness distribution of the light source is not flat in the longitudinal direction of the light source, there is also a method of adjusting the shape of the parallel groove of the light guide plate, particularly the angle of the tip portion, according to the position in the longitudinal direction of the light source. . For example, in the case where the brightness of the light source increases from the end to the center in the longitudinal direction of the light source, as shown in FIGS. 37A to 37D, the light guide plate 18 extends in the longitudinal direction of the light source 12. The shape may be such that the angle of the tip of the parallel groove 18f of the light guide plate 18 increases from the end (see FIGS. 37B and 37D) toward the center (see FIG. 37C).
[0117] 一方、導光板の光射出面と平行で、かつ光源の長手方向と直交する方向において 、光源の輝度分布が平坦でない、または、導光板の光射出面から出射される光の輝 度分布が平坦でない等の場合は、複数の光源の配置間隔を変えても良い、つまり、 配置位置に応じて各導光板の幅を調整してもよい。例えば、光射出面と平行で、か つ光源の長手方向と直交する方向において、導光板の端部から中央部に向かうに 従って輝度が高くなる場合は、図 38の下方の図に示すように、導光板 18の光射出 面 18aと平行で、かつ光源 12の長手方向と直交する方向において、導光板 18の中 央カも離れるほど光源 12の配置の間隔が狭くなる形状としてもよい。 On the other hand, in a direction parallel to the light exit surface of the light guide plate and perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the light source, the luminance distribution of the light source is not flat, or the brightness of light emitted from the light exit surface of the light guide plate. In the case where the distribution is not flat or the like, the arrangement interval of the plurality of light sources may be changed, that is, the width of each light guide plate may be adjusted according to the arrangement position. For example, parallel to the light exit surface If the brightness increases from the end of the light guide plate toward the center in the direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the light source, as shown in the lower part of FIG. 38, the light exit surface 18a of the light guide plate 18 In a direction parallel to and perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the light source 12, the distance between the light sources 12 may be narrower as the center of the light guide plate 18 is further away.
[0118] また、導光板の光射出面を、光源の長手方向と直交する面での断面形状が曲線と なる曲面形状として、光射出面と平行で、かつ光源の長手方向と直交する方向にお ける、光源の輝度分布、または導光板の光射出面力も出射される光の輝度分布を平 坦にしても良い。例えば、光射出面と平行で、かつ光源の長手方向と直交する方向 において、導光板の端部から中央部に向かうに従って輝度が高くなる場合は、図 39 に示すように、導光板 18を光源 12の長手方向と直交する面での断面形状が光源 12 側に凸となる R形状の曲面として、導光板 18の光射出面と平行で、かつ光源の長手 方向と直交する方向にお!、て、導光板の端部から中央部に向かうに従ってそれぞれ の導光板に配置された光源と液晶表示パネル 4との距離が離れる形状としても良い。  [0118] Further, the light exit surface of the light guide plate is formed into a curved surface shape having a curved cross-sectional shape in a plane perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the light source, and is formed in a direction parallel to the light exit surface and perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the light source. In this case, the luminance distribution of the light source or the light exit surface force of the light guide plate may also make the luminance distribution of the emitted light flat. For example, if the brightness increases from the end of the light guide plate toward the center in a direction parallel to the light exit surface and perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the light source, the light guide plate 18 is moved to the light source as shown in FIG. A cross-sectional shape in a plane orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the light source 12 is convex to the side of the light source 12 as an R-shaped curved surface in a direction parallel to the light exit surface of the light guide plate 18 and orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the light source. Then, the shape may be such that the distance between the light source disposed on each light guide plate and the liquid crystal display panel 4 increases from the end of the light guide plate toward the center.
[0119] また、光源の長手方向の端部付近の輝度分布がその他の部分と異なる場合は、図 40Aに示すように、光源 12の長手方向の導光板 18の端部 402が、導光板 18の光 射出面に対して垂直な方向から所定角度の傾斜を有する形状としてもよい。さらに、 光射出面と平行で、かつ光源の長手方向と直交する方向における導光板の端部付 近の輝度分布がその他の部分と異なる場合も、図 40Bおよび図 40Cに示すように、 光射出面と平行で、かつ光源の長手方向と直交する方向の導光板の端部が、導光 板の光射出面に対して垂直な方向から所定角度の傾斜を有する形状としてもよい。 このように、光源に応じて導光板の形状を調整することで、光射出面から均一な光 を出射させることができる。  When the luminance distribution near the longitudinal end of the light source is different from that of the other portions, as shown in FIG. 40A, the end 402 of the light guide plate 18 in the longitudinal direction of the light source 12 is A shape having a predetermined angle of inclination from a direction perpendicular to the light exit surface may be used. Furthermore, when the luminance distribution near the end of the light guide plate in a direction parallel to the light exit surface and perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the light source is different from that of the other portions, as shown in FIG. 40B and FIG. The end of the light guide plate in a direction parallel to the surface and perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the light source may have a shape having a predetermined angle of inclination from a direction perpendicular to the light exit surface of the light guide plate. In this way, by adjusting the shape of the light guide plate according to the light source, uniform light can be emitted from the light exit surface.
[0120] さらに、ノ ックライトの厚みを厚くすることが可能な場合等には、図 41Aに示すように 導光板 18の光出射面を光源 12の長手方向の断面形状が曲線となる緩やかな曲面 形状にしても、または、図 41Bに示すように、光源 12の長手方向と直交する方向に 延びる微小高さのリブ 412を導光板 19の光射出面上に設けてもよい。これにより、光 源の長手方向と直交する方向における導光板のたわみを防止できる。さらに、リブ 41 2は、導光板 18と拡散シート等のバックライトユニットを構成するシート状部材との間 に所定の空隙を形成するスぺーサとしても機能し、液晶表示パネルを照明する光の 照度をより均一化することができる。 Further, when it is possible to increase the thickness of the knock light, for example, as shown in FIG. 41A, the light exit surface of the light guide plate 18 is formed into a gently curved surface having a curved cross-sectional shape in the longitudinal direction of the light source 12. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 41B, a minute height rib 412 extending in a direction orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the light source 12 may be provided on the light exit surface of the light guide plate 19 as shown in FIG. 41B. This can prevent the light guide plate from bending in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction of the light source. Further, the rib 412 is provided between the light guide plate 18 and a sheet-like member constituting a backlight unit such as a diffusion sheet. The liquid crystal display panel also functions as a spacer for forming a predetermined gap, thereby making the illuminance of the light illuminating the liquid crystal display panel more uniform.
[0121] また、図 42に示すように、導光板 18の傾斜面に反射シートを貼り付け、反射シート を導光板の平行溝まで延長することにより、光源の位置を規制したり、もしくは仮固定 したりしてちょい。  [0121] Further, as shown in Fig. 42, a reflection sheet is attached to the inclined surface of the light guide plate 18, and the reflection sheet is extended to the parallel groove of the light guide plate to regulate the position of the light source or to temporarily fix the light source. Or just a little.
光源位置を規制することにより、導光板に対する光源の位置が一定となり、輝度ム ラを低減することができる。また、光源を仮固定することにより、ノ ックライトユニットの 組立性を向上することができる。  By regulating the position of the light source, the position of the light source with respect to the light guide plate becomes constant, and luminance unevenness can be reduced. Further, by temporarily fixing the light source, the assemblability of the knock light unit can be improved.
[0122] また、図 42に示すように、光源として冷陰極管を使用する場合には、冷陰極管を抱 え込むような弾性部材、例えば、透明な Oリングを冷陰極管の端部に設けてもよい。 このような弾性部材を設けることにより、弾性部材が緩衝材として作用するため、導光 板の平行溝に冷陰極管を配置したときに、冷陰極管が平行溝と衝突して冷陰極管が 破損することを防ぐことができる。また、弾性部材を冷陰極管に固定することにより組 立ておよび製造工程内における扱いが向上する。さらには、図 42に示すように、冷 陰極管の両端部に電極カバーを設けることによって、ノ ックライトユニットを収容する 筐体からの冷陰極管の着脱を容易にすることもできる。  [0122] As shown in Fig. 42, when a cold cathode tube is used as a light source, an elastic member that embraces the cold cathode tube, for example, a transparent O-ring is attached to the end of the cold cathode tube. It may be provided. By providing such an elastic member, the elastic member acts as a cushioning material. Therefore, when the cold cathode tube is arranged in the parallel groove of the light guide plate, the cold cathode tube collides with the parallel groove and the cold cathode tube is turned on. Damage can be prevented. Further, by fixing the elastic member to the cold cathode tube, handling in the assembly and manufacturing process is improved. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 42, by providing electrode covers at both ends of the cold cathode tube, it is possible to easily attach and detach the cold cathode tube from the housing that houses the knock light unit.
[0123] また、冷陰極管の長手方向の端部をスポンジなどで保持しつつ、導光板の平行溝 の長手方向の側面部分を閉塞することにより、外部から導光板の平行溝内へ塵埃が 侵入することを防ぐとともに、冷陰極管が部分的に冷却されることを防止してもよい。 以上、本発明の導光板、これを用いる面状照明装置および液晶表示装置について 詳細に説明したが、本発明は前記実施例に限定されず、本発明の主旨を逸脱しな V、範囲にぉ 、て、種々の改良や変更をしてもょ 、ことは勿論である。  [0123] Further, by holding the longitudinal end of the cold-cathode tube with a sponge or the like and closing the longitudinal side surface of the parallel groove of the light guide plate, dust enters the parallel groove of the light guide plate from the outside. In addition to preventing the cold cathode tube from entering, the cold cathode tube may be prevented from being partially cooled. As described above, the light guide plate, the planar lighting device and the liquid crystal display device using the same according to the present invention have been described in detail. However, the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiments, and the present invention is not limited thereto. Of course, various improvements and changes may be made, of course.
産業上の利用可能性  Industrial applicability
[0124] 以上詳細に説明した様に、本発明の導光板は、その内部に形成された平行溝に光 源を収容することができるので、従来よりも薄型化および軽量ィ匕でき、光射出面に対 する傾斜面の角度 Φ 1 (rad)と両最端部間の距離 Wとの関係が Φ 1 XW≤200 (mm )を満足することにより、また、平行溝の断面形状を光射出面に向かう先端部分に向 力つて細くしていくことにより、照度または輝度のピークを低減でき、光射出面力もより 均一でむらの少ない、かつより高輝度な照明光を出射することができ、さらに、複数 の導光板を連結しても、連結部分での輝線の発生を低減することができる。その結果 、本発明の導光板は、導光板の光射出面のサイズをより大サイズとすることができる。 また、本発明の面状照明装置は、薄型で軽量であり、より低コストでの製造が可能 であり、より均一でむらの少ない、かつより高輝度な照明光を出射することのでき、ま た、照明表面を大サイズとすることができ、壁掛けテレビなどの液晶表示装置に適用 することができる。 As described in detail above, the light guide plate of the present invention can accommodate the light source in the parallel groove formed therein, so that it can be made thinner and lighter than before, and When the relationship between the angle Φ 1 (rad) of the inclined surface with respect to the surface and the distance W between the two extreme ends satisfies Φ 1 XW ≤ 200 (mm), the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove is By narrowing the tip toward the surface, it is possible to reduce the peak of illuminance or brightness, and to increase the light output surface power. It is possible to emit uniform, less uneven and higher-luminance illumination light, and furthermore, even if a plurality of light guide plates are connected, it is possible to reduce the occurrence of bright lines at the connection portions. As a result, in the light guide plate of the present invention, the size of the light exit surface of the light guide plate can be made larger. In addition, the spread illuminating device of the present invention is thin and lightweight, can be manufactured at lower cost, can emit more uniform, less uneven, and higher-luminance illumination light. In addition, the lighting surface can be made large, so that it can be applied to a liquid crystal display device such as a wall-mounted television.
また、本発明の液晶表示装置は、薄型で軽量であり、より低コストでの製造が可能 であり、より均一でむらの少ない、かつより高輝度な表示を行うことができ、また、その 表示画面を大サイズとすることができ、壁掛けテレビなどの壁掛け型とすることができ る。  Further, the liquid crystal display device of the present invention is thin and lightweight, can be manufactured at lower cost, can provide a more uniform, less uneven, and higher-luminance display. The screen can be large and can be a wall-mounted type such as a wall-mounted television.

Claims

請求の範囲 The scope of the claims
[1] 透明な導光板であって、  [1] a transparent light guide plate,
矩形状光射出面と、  A rectangular light exit surface;
前記矩形状光射出面の一辺に平行で矩形状略中央部に位置する一対の厚肉部と 前記一辺に直交する方向で前記厚肉部よりも外側に位置し、前記厚肉部に平行に 形成される一対の薄肉端部と、  A pair of thick portions parallel to one side of the rectangular light exit surface and positioned at a substantially central portion of the rectangular shape, and located outside the thick portion in a direction orthogonal to the one side and parallel to the thick portion. A pair of thin ends formed,
棒状光源が収納され、前記一対の厚肉部の間に位置し、前記矩形状光射出面が 形成されている側と反対側に前記一辺と平行に形成される平行溝と、  A parallel groove formed therein, in which a rod-shaped light source is housed and positioned between the pair of thick portions and opposite to the side on which the rectangular light emission surface is formed, and parallel to the one side;
前記棒状光源の軸を含み前記矩形状光射出面に対して垂直な面に対して対称で あり、前記厚肉部力も前記一辺に直交する方向に前記一対の薄肉端部に向力つて 肉厚が薄くなるように、前記矩形状光射出面に対して傾斜する傾斜背面を形成する 一対の傾斜背面部と、を有し、  The thick portion is symmetrical with respect to a plane including the axis of the rod-shaped light source and perpendicular to the rectangular light exit surface, and the thick portion force is directed to the pair of thin ends in a direction orthogonal to the one side. And a pair of inclined rear portions forming an inclined rear surface inclined with respect to the rectangular light exit surface, so that
前記平行溝は、その直交方向の断面形状において、前記平行溝の前記矩形状光 射出面に垂直な中心線に対して前記矩形状光射出面に向力つて前記平行溝の先 端部分を対称に細くなつており、  The parallel groove is symmetrical in its cross section in the orthogonal direction with respect to a center line perpendicular to the rectangular light exit surface of the parallel groove toward the rectangular light exit surface. It is thin,
前記矩形状光射出面に対する前記傾斜背面の角度 Φ 1 (rad)と両最端部間の距離 Wとの関係力 Φ 1 X W≤ 200 (mm)を満足する導光板。  A light guide plate satisfying a relational force Φ 1 XW ≦ 200 (mm) between an angle Φ 1 (rad) of the inclined back surface with respect to the rectangular light exit surface and a distance W between both end portions.
[2] 複数個の、請求項 1に記載の導光板からなり、矩形状光射出面が同一方向となる 様にその前記一対の薄肉端部の一方が互いに連結されて 、ることを特徴とする導光 板。 [2] A plurality of the light guide plates according to claim 1, wherein one of the pair of thin end portions is connected to each other such that the rectangular light exit surfaces are in the same direction. Light guide plate.
[3] 請求項 1に記載の導光板を繰返し単位とし、複数の繰返し単位の連結部が継ぎ目 なく一体となって並列して配置された構造を有する導光板。  [3] A light guide plate having a structure in which the light guide plate according to claim 1 is used as a repeating unit, and a connecting portion of the plurality of repeating units is arranged seamlessly and integrally in parallel.
[4] さらに、複数連結した場合の連結部における平行溝に垂直な断面の形状が円弧状[4] Furthermore, the cross section perpendicular to the parallel groove in the connecting portion when a plurality of connecting portions are connected is an arc shape
、または多角形の形状を有する請求項 1〜3のいずれかに記載の導光板。 4. The light guide plate according to claim 1, wherein the light guide plate has a polygonal shape.
[5] さらに、複数連結した場合の連結部における前記矩形状光射出面に対する前記傾 斜背面の角度 φ 2 (rad)力 Φ 2< Φ 1を満足する請求項 4に記載の導光板。 5. The light guide plate according to claim 4, further comprising an angle φ 2 (rad) force Φ 2 <Φ 1 of the inclined rear surface with respect to the rectangular light exit surface in the connection portion when a plurality of the connection portions are connected.
[6] 前記平行溝の断面形状にお!、て、前記先端部分は、前記棒状光源の中心から前 記矩形状光射出面に向力う垂線に対する角度力 両側で 90度以内となる部分であ る請求項 1〜5のいずれかに記載の導光板。 [6] In the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove, the tip portion is located forward of the center of the rod-shaped light source. The light guide plate according to any one of claims 1 to 5, wherein an angular force with respect to a perpendicular directed to the rectangular light exit surface is a portion that is within 90 degrees on both sides.
[7] 前記平行溝の少なくとも前記先端部分の断面形状が、互いに交わる先鋭な 1つの 交点を有する、前記中心線に対して対称な 2つの直線または曲線の一部力もなる請 求項 1〜6のいずれかに記載の導光板。 [7] Claims 1 to 6, wherein the cross-sectional shape of at least the distal end portion of the parallel groove has a part of two straight lines or curves symmetric with respect to the center line, each having one sharp intersection point intersecting with each other. The light guide plate according to any one of the above.
[8] 前記平行溝の少なくとも前記先端部分の断面形状、または、前記平行溝の断面形 状力 三角形である請求項 1〜7のいずれかに記載の導光板。 [8] The light guide plate according to any one of claims 1 to 7, wherein a cross-sectional shape of at least the distal end portion of the parallel groove or a cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove is triangular.
[9] 前記平行溝の少なくとも前記先端部分の断面形状となる前記 2つの曲線が、前記 平行溝の中心に向かって凸または凹である請求項 7に記載の導光板。 [9] The light guide plate according to claim 7, wherein the two curves each having a cross-sectional shape of at least the end portion of the parallel groove are convex or concave toward the center of the parallel groove.
[10] 前記平行溝の少なくとも前記先端部分の断面形状、または、前記平行溝の断面形 状となる前記 2つの曲線が、前記平行溝の中心に向かって凸または凹の、円、楕円、 放物線、または双曲線の一部である請求項 7または 9に記載の導光板。 [10] A circle, an ellipse, or a parabola, wherein at least the cross-sectional shape of the tip portion of the parallel groove or the two curves that are the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove are convex or concave toward the center of the parallel groove. 10. The light guide plate according to claim 7 or 9, which is a part of a hyperbola.
[11] 前記平行溝の前記先端部分の頂部の断面形状が、前記対称な 2つの直線または 曲線が交わる前に互いに前記中心線に対して対称な直線または曲線で接続された 形状である請求項 7〜: L0のいずれかに記載の導光板。 [11] The cross-sectional shape of the top portion of the tip portion of the parallel groove is a shape in which the two symmetrical straight lines or curves are connected to each other by a symmetrical straight line or a curve with respect to the center line before intersecting. 7 to: The light guide plate according to any of L0.
[12] 前記平行溝の前記先端部分の前記頂部の断面形状が、前記先鋭な 1つの交点が 面取りされた前記矩形状光射出面に平行な部分を持つ形状である請求項 11に記載 の導光板。 12. The guide according to claim 11, wherein a cross-sectional shape of the top portion of the distal end portion of the parallel groove has a portion parallel to the rectangular light exit surface in which the sharp intersection point is chamfered. Light board.
[13] 前記平行溝の少なくとも前記先端部分の断面形状、または、前記平行溝の断面形 状が、三角形であり、前記平行溝の前記先端部分の前記頂部の断面形状が、前記 中心線に対して対称な台形状である請求項 11または 12に記載の導光板。  [13] The cross-sectional shape of at least the tip portion of the parallel groove or the cross-sectional shape of the parallel groove is triangular, and the cross-sectional shape of the top portion of the tip portion of the parallel groove is different from the center line. 13. The light guide plate according to claim 11, wherein the light guide plate has a symmetrical trapezoidal shape.
[14] 前記平行溝の前記先端部分の前記頂部の断面形状が、前記矩形状光射出面に 対して凸または凹の、前記中心線に対して対称な曲線状である請求項 11に記載の 導光板。  14. The cross-sectional shape of the top portion of the tip portion of the parallel groove is a curved shape that is convex or concave with respect to the rectangular light exit surface and is symmetric with respect to the center line. Light guide plate.
[15] 前記平行溝の前記先端部分の前記頂部の断面形状が、前記中心線に対して対称 に前記先鋭な 1つの交点が丸められた円形状、楕円形状、放物線状、または双曲線 状である請求項 11または 14に記載の導光板。  [15] The cross-sectional shape of the top portion of the tip portion of the parallel groove is a circle, an ellipse, a parabola, or a hyperbola in which the one point of intersection is rounded symmetrically with respect to the center line. The light guide plate according to claim 11.
[16] 前記平行溝の少なくとも前記先端部分の断面形状が、楕円形または双曲線の一部 である請求項 1〜3のいずれかに記載の導光板。 [16] The cross-sectional shape of at least the tip portion of the parallel groove is an ellipse or a part of a hyperbola. The light guide plate according to any one of claims 1 to 3, wherein
[17] 請求項 1〜16いずれかに記載の光透過性榭脂よりなる導光板において、 [17] A light guide plate comprising the light-transmitting resin according to any one of claims 1 to 16,
前記矩形状光射出面に対して垂直で前記棒状光源の中心軸を含む面から前記薄 肉端部の端面までの距離を L (mm)とし、前記棒状光源の中心から、前記矩形状光 射出面に平行で前記傾斜背面との交点までの距離を Δ L (mm)、前記光透過性榭 脂の光透過率を t%、前記交点から、前記矩形状光射出面に対して垂直な方向にお ける前記矩形状光射出面までの距離を D (mm)としたときに、下記の式:  The distance from a plane perpendicular to the rectangular light emitting surface and including the central axis of the rod-shaped light source to the end face of the thin end portion is L (mm), and the rectangular light emission is performed from the center of the rod-shaped light source. The distance parallel to the plane and the intersection with the inclined back surface is ΔL (mm), the light transmittance of the light transmitting resin is t%, and the direction perpendicular to the rectangular light exit surface from the intersection is When the distance to the rectangular light exit surface in the above is defined as D (mm), the following equation is obtained.
t= { l -kl X (D/L- A L) } X 100  t = {l -kl X (D / L- A L)} X 100
0<kl≤2  0 <kl≤2
を満たすことを特徴とする導光板。  A light guide plate characterized by satisfying the following.
[18] 請求項 1〜17いずれかに記載の導光板において、前記棒状光源から入射された 光を出射面から射出する際の前記光射出面における全光束量を I [18] The light guide plate according to any one of [1] to [17], wherein the total light flux amount on the light exit surface when the light incident from the rod-shaped light source exits from the exit surface is I.
BLU、前記棒状光 源表面の全光束量を I  BLU, the total luminous flux on the rod-shaped light source surface
CFLとしたときに、前記矩形状光射出面に対して垂直で前記棒 状光源の中心軸を含む面力 前記薄肉端部の端面までの距離 L (mm)が、下記式: L=k2 X (I /\ )  When CFL is used, the surface force perpendicular to the rectangular light exit surface and including the central axis of the rod-shaped light source is expressed by the following formula: L (mm) to the end surface of the thin end portion: L = k2 X (I / \)
CFL BLU  CFL BLU
l≤k2≤160  l≤k2≤160
を満足することを特徴とする導光板。  A light guide plate characterized by satisfying the following.
[19] 前記平行溝の前記先端部分の頂部が、砂ずり面である請求項 1〜18のいずれか に記載の導光板。 [19] The light guide plate according to any one of claims 1 to 18, wherein a top portion of the tip portion of the parallel groove is a gravel surface.
[20] 前記矩形状光射出面の、前記平行溝の前記先端部分の頂部に相当する部分に網 点を有する請求項 1〜19のいずれかに記載の導光板。  [20] The light guide plate according to any one of claims 1 to 19, wherein the rectangular light exit surface has a halftone dot at a portion corresponding to a top of the tip portion of the parallel groove.
[21] 請求項 1〜20のいずれかに記載の導光板と、 [21] The light guide plate according to any one of claims 1 to 20,
前記導光板の前記平行溝に収納される棒状光源と、  A rod-shaped light source housed in the parallel groove of the light guide plate;
前記平行溝を塞ぐように前記棒状光源を背後に設けられるリフレクタと、 前記導光板の前記厚肉部の両側の前記傾斜背面部の前記傾斜背面に取り付けら れる反射シートとを有することを特徴とする面状照明装置。  A reflector provided behind the rod-shaped light source so as to close the parallel groove, and a reflection sheet attached to the inclined rear surface of the inclined rear portion on both sides of the thick portion of the light guide plate. Surface illumination device.
[22] 請求項 21における面状照明装置において、 [22] The planar lighting device according to claim 21,
前記導光板の前記矩形状光射出面上に配置される拡散シートとを有することを特 徴とする面状照明装置。 A light diffusing sheet disposed on the rectangular light exit surface of the light guide plate. Area lighting device.
[23] さらに、前記導光板の前記矩形状光射出面と前記拡散シートとの間に配置される プリズムシートを有することを特徴とする請求項 22に記載の面状照明装置。  23. The spread illuminating apparatus according to claim 22, further comprising a prism sheet disposed between the rectangular light exit surface of the light guide plate and the diffusion sheet.
[24] 前記矩形状光射出面の前記平行溝に相当する第 1部分において前記平行溝に収 納された棒状光源力ゝらの射出光によって形成される相対照度または相対輝度のピー ク値の、前記傾斜背面部に相当する第 2部分において前記射出光によって形成され る相対照度または相対輝度の平均値に対する比は、前記導光板の前記矩形状光射 出面と前記拡散シートとの間に許容される間隔、または面状照明装置に許容される 厚み応じて設定される請求項 22または 23に記載の面状照明装置。  [24] In a first portion corresponding to the parallel groove of the rectangular light exit surface, a peak value of relative illuminance or relative luminance formed by the emission light of the rod-shaped light source force stored in the parallel groove. The ratio of the relative illuminance or relative luminance formed by the emitted light in the second portion corresponding to the inclined back surface portion to the average value is allowed between the rectangular light emitting surface of the light guide plate and the diffusion sheet. 24. The spread illuminating device according to claim 22 or 23, wherein the spread illuminating device is set according to an interval to be set or a thickness allowed for the spread illuminating device.
[25] 請求項 21〜24のいずれかに記載の面状照明装置力もなるノ ックライトユニットと、 このノ ックライトユニットの光射出面側に配置される液晶表示パネルと、前記バック ライトユニットおよび前記液晶表示パネルを駆動する駆動ユニットとを有することを特 徴とする液晶表示装置。  [25] A knock light unit which also has the power of the planar lighting device according to any one of claims 21 to 24, a liquid crystal display panel arranged on a light emission surface side of the knock light unit, and the backlight unit and A liquid crystal display device comprising: a driving unit that drives the liquid crystal display panel.
PCT/JP2005/009245 2004-05-21 2005-05-20 Optical waveguide, planar illuminating device using the same and liquid crystal display device WO2005114046A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2004-151835 2004-05-21
JP2004151835 2004-05-21
JP2005-041401 2005-02-17
JP2005041401 2005-02-17

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2005114046A1 true WO2005114046A1 (en) 2005-12-01

Family

ID=35428461

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2005/009245 WO2005114046A1 (en) 2004-05-21 2005-05-20 Optical waveguide, planar illuminating device using the same and liquid crystal display device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2005114046A1 (en)

Cited By (2)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP1813859A1 (en) * 2004-11-09 2007-08-01 Fujifilm Corporation Light guide plate, surface illuminator using same and liquid crystal display
JP2010153328A (en) * 2008-12-26 2010-07-08 Nittoh Kogaku Kk Optical element and light-emitting device

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH0527238A (en) * 1991-07-19 1993-02-05 Sharp Corp Liquid crystal illuminator
JPH05249320A (en) * 1992-03-04 1993-09-28 Nisshin Hightech Kk Optical waveguide device for surface illumination
JP2001133779A (en) * 1999-11-08 2001-05-18 Hitachi Ltd Liquid crystal display device
JP2002075036A (en) * 2000-08-31 2002-03-15 Hitachi Ltd Surface lighting equipment and display device comprising it
JP3093080U (en) * 2002-09-27 2003-04-18 三和企業股▲ふん▼有限公司 Direct backlight module structure

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JPH0527238A (en) * 1991-07-19 1993-02-05 Sharp Corp Liquid crystal illuminator
JPH05249320A (en) * 1992-03-04 1993-09-28 Nisshin Hightech Kk Optical waveguide device for surface illumination
JP2001133779A (en) * 1999-11-08 2001-05-18 Hitachi Ltd Liquid crystal display device
JP2002075036A (en) * 2000-08-31 2002-03-15 Hitachi Ltd Surface lighting equipment and display device comprising it
JP3093080U (en) * 2002-09-27 2003-04-18 三和企業股▲ふん▼有限公司 Direct backlight module structure

Cited By (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
EP1813859A1 (en) * 2004-11-09 2007-08-01 Fujifilm Corporation Light guide plate, surface illuminator using same and liquid crystal display
EP1813859A4 (en) * 2004-11-09 2010-03-17 Fujifilm Corp Light guide plate, surface illuminator using same and liquid crystal display
JP2010153328A (en) * 2008-12-26 2010-07-08 Nittoh Kogaku Kk Optical element and light-emitting device

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
JP4994384B2 (en) Backlight unit with linearly reduced divergence
EP1847767A1 (en) Light guide plate, and planar lighting device and liquid crystal display device using such light guide plate
JP4607648B2 (en) Light guide plate, planar illumination device including the same, and liquid crystal display device
JP4264013B2 (en) Light guide plate, planar illumination device using the same, and liquid crystal display device
US7556391B2 (en) Transmittance adjuster unit, a planar illumination device, a liquid crystal display device using the same, and a method of arranging transmittance adjusters
US6356391B1 (en) Optical film with variable angle prisms
US7868970B2 (en) Light guide plate, as well as a planar lighting device and liquid crystal display apparatus using the same
EP1831740A1 (en) Optical film having a surface with rounded structures
KR20110019388A (en) Hollow backlight with tilted light source
JP2010510545A (en) Backlight display with improved illuminance uniformity
JP2010510546A (en) Backlight display with high illumination uniformity
TWI460503B (en) Backlight unit
WO2009142226A1 (en) Illumination device and display device
JP5051981B2 (en) Light guide plate, planar illumination device using the same, and liquid crystal display device
JP4542478B2 (en) Light guide plate, planar illumination device using the same, and liquid crystal display device
JP2009176512A (en) Surface light source device and image display apparatus
JP4555250B2 (en) Light guide plate and planar illumination device using the same
JP2007027044A (en) Light guide plate, planar lighting device equipped with it, and liquid crystal display equipped with it
JP4963726B2 (en) Surface illumination device and liquid crystal display device
JP2007059164A (en) Light guide plate, and planar lighting system and liquid crystal display device using the same
WO2005114046A1 (en) Optical waveguide, planar illuminating device using the same and liquid crystal display device
KR100742726B1 (en) Back light unit
WO2007023995A1 (en) Light guide plate unit, planar illumination device, and liquid crystal display device
WO2005121639A1 (en) Optical waveguide, and planar illuminating apparatus and liquid crystal display apparatus using the optical waveguide
JP2006339043A (en) Planar lighting device, and liquid crystal display device with same

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
AK Designated states

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): AE AG AL AM AT AU AZ BA BB BG BR BW BY BZ CA CH CN CO CR CU CZ DE DK DM DZ EC EE EG ES FI GB GD GE GH GM HR HU ID IL IN IS JP KE KG KM KP KR KZ LC LK LR LS LT LU LV MA MD MG MK MN MW MX MZ NA NG NI NO NZ OM PG PH PL PT RO RU SC SD SE SG SK SL SM SY TJ TM TN TR TT TZ UA UG US UZ VC VN YU ZA ZM ZW

AL Designated countries for regional patents

Kind code of ref document: A1

Designated state(s): BW GH GM KE LS MW MZ NA SD SL SZ TZ UG ZM ZW AM AZ BY KG KZ MD RU TJ TM AT BE BG CH CY CZ DE DK EE ES FI FR GB GR HU IE IS IT LT LU MC NL PL PT RO SE SI SK TR BF BJ CF CG CI CM GA GN GQ GW ML MR NE SN TD TG

121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application
NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: DE

WWW Wipo information: withdrawn in national office

Country of ref document: DE

122 Ep: pct application non-entry in european phase
NENP Non-entry into the national phase

Ref country code: JP